Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.

Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic

Mold Process

Module Overview:
In this module, you learn about the basic mold process that is typically used to
take a part from its design stage to the creation of its mold. This simplified
process is used at most companies; however, your specific company process
may differ. The process is explained in further detail throughout the course
modules.

Objectives:
After completing this module, you will be able to:
 Run a draft check on a design model.
 Create a new mold model and assemble the reference model and workpiece.
 Create a slider mold volume for undercut geometry.
 Create the mold parting surface using a skirt surface.
 Create the mold components by splitting the mold volumes and generating the
cavity components.
 Create mold features by creating a runner in the mold model.
 Fill and open the mold by creating a molding and performing a mold opening
analysis.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process

Preparing and Analyzing Design Models

When you create a mold for a design model, you should first inspect the model
and analyze it to verify that it is indeed ready to be molded. Typically, the
reference model geometry that you use for a mold model is derived from the
design model. You can analyze the design model and reference model for
adequate draft features and consistent thickness, adding draft features if
necessary. It is critical that the final reference model has sufficient draft so that it
can be cleanly ejected from the mold.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Analyzing a Design Model

Creating the Mold Model

Start the mold design by creating a mold manufacturing model. Creo Parametric
automatically creates the mold assembly when you create the mold
manufacturing model. The mold manufacturing model is also referred to as the
Mold Model. Next, you assemble the reference model, which can be either the
design model that is to be molded or a new model derived from the design model.
You can account for the contraction of the molding part during cooling in the
molding process by applying a shrinkage factor to the reference model. You also
create or assemble the workpiece that represents the full volume of all the mold
components that are needed to complete the mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Creating the Mold Model and Parting Surface

Creating Mold Volumes

You can create mold volumes manually using sketch-based features. A mold
volume is a three-dimensional, enclosed surface quilt with no mass in the
workpiece of a mold model. You can also manually create a special type of mold
volume called a slider. Creo Parametric can also create one automatically by
calculating undercut areas in the mold model.

Creating Parting Surfaces

You can create parting surfaces for the mold model using the skirt surface
technique. The skirt surface technique requires parting lines that you create by
using silhouette curves. You can use the parting surfaces to split the workpiece
into separate mold volumes later in the mold design process. You can also create
parting surfaces manually.

Creating Mold Components

You can split the workpiece volume into one or more mold volumes based on the
parting surfaces. The main mold volumes are classified into core and cavity.
Once the desired mold volumes are created and split, you can create the mold
components, including sliders, from the mold volumes. The mold components are
fully functional parts that you can open and modify in the Part mode of Creo
Parametric. You can also machine the components using Creo NC.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Creating Mold Features

You can create regular and user-defined assembly features to facilitate the
molding process. Regular features include mold-specific features such as
waterlines, runners, and ejector-pin clearance holes. You can also create user-
defined features from regular cuts and slots that are placed on mold models to
create sprues.

Filling and Opening the Mold

You can create the molding component that represents the filled mold cavity.
Creo Parametric creates the molding component automatically by determining
the volume remaining in the workpiece after extracting the mold components.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Filling and Opening the Mold

You can then define the steps for the mold-opening process for every component
in the mold model except the reference model and workpiece. During the mold
opening analysis, you can determine whether there is interference with any static
components for each of the steps that you define.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so
already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click
File > Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session >
Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Process\Mold folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CAMERA.PRT.

Objectives
 Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.
 Create a mold model.
 Create mold volumes.
 Create a parting surface.
 Create mold components.
 Create mold features.
 Fill and open the resulting mold.
You are a design engineer in a camera company. You have been provided with
the front housing of a new camera design and are tasked with creating the
manufacturing mold for it. You know from previously received models that you
must first prepare and analyze the design model to verify that it can be
manufactured.
Once you have verified that the design model can be manufactured using a mold,
you can create the mold model and mold volumes. You can then create the mold-
parting surface and mold components. Finally, you can fill and open the resulting
mold.

Step 1. Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click Mold/Cast from the Engineering group to toggle from the standard
application to the Mold application.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

4. Click Draft from the Analysis group.

5. To perform a draft check, do the following:
 In the model tree, select CAMERA.PRT.
 In the Draft Analysis dialog box, clear the Use the pull direction check box.
 Click in the Direction collector and select datum plane TOP.
 Type 0.5 as the value for the Draft angle and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

6. In the Color Scale dialog box, click Expand .

7. Edit the number of colors to 3.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
 The positive draft areas appear in blue and the negative draft areas in red. The vertical walls appear in
gray. This demonstrates that the part is fully drafted and is ready to be used in creating a mold model.

8. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.

9. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Step 2. Create the camera mold model.

10. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.

11. In the New dialog box, do the following:
 Select Manufacturing as the Type.
 Select Mold cavity as the Sub-type.
 Type camera_mold as the Name.
 Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
 Select the mmns_mfg_mold template.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
12. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
 Click Add.
 Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
 Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.

13. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group to assemble the
reference model.
14. In the Open dialog box, select CAMERA.PRT and click Open.
15. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Same model as the Reference
model type and click OK.
16. Specify the mold cavity layout by doing the following:

 Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box and select the
MAIN coordinate system in the CAMERA.PRT sub-window.
 Click Preview and notice how the reference model is assembled and oriented.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
17. In the Layout dialog box, select Rectangular as the Layout.
 Select X-Symmetric as the Orientation.
 Type 120 as the X Increment value and 150 as the Y Increment value.
 Click Preview.
 Notice that a pattern of reference models, symmetric about the X-axis, are
assembled to create a multi-cavity mold.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
18. In the Layout dialog box, select Y-Symmetric as the Orientation and click
Preview.
19. Notice that a pattern of reference models, symmetric about the Y-axis, are
assembled to create a multi-cavity mold.
20. Select Single as the Layout to create a single-cavity mold and click OK.
21. In the Warning message window, click OK to accept the change in the absolute
accuracy value.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
22. Apply shrinkage to the reference model by doing the following:

 Select Shrink by scale from the Shrinkage types drop-down menu in the
Modifiers group.
 In the model tree, click the node for CAMERA.PRT to expand it and select the
PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate system.
 Type 0.005 as the Shrink Ratio in the Shrinkage By Scale dialog box and press
ENTER.

 Click Apply Changes .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 9

23. Select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in
the Reference Model & Workpiece group to create an automatic workpiece.
24. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, do the following:
 Select the MOLD_DEF_CSYS coordinate system from the graphics window as
the Mold Origin.
 Type 20 for the negative, and type 20 for the positive X direction values.
 Type 30 for the negative, and type 30 for the positive Y direction values.
 Type 20 for the negative, and type 20 for the positive Z direction values.
 Click OK.

25. Disable Plane Display and Csys Display .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
26. Select CAMERA_MOLD_WRK.PRT.
27. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
28. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
29. Select the Mold tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

Step 3. Create slider mold volumes.

30. Select Mold Volume from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group to create the slider volume.
31. To rename the mold volume feature, do the following:

 Click Properties from the Controls group.

 Type Slider as the Name of the mold volume in the Properties dialog box and
press ENTER.

32. Click Slider from the Volume Tools group.

33. In the Slider Volume dialog box, do the following:
 Click Calculate Undercut Boundaries .
 Press CTRL and select Quilt 1 and Quilt 2 from the Exclude column.
 Click Include Boundary Surfaces to add the selected quilts to the Include
column for slider calculation.

 Click Select Projection Plane and select the right surface of the workpiece.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 12

34. Click Apply Changes from the Slider Volume dialog box.

35. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 13
 You can also manually sketch the shape of the slider volume to represent a standard shape that can be
manufactured.

Step 4. Create a parting surface.

36. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group to automatically
create parting line curves.
37. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, click Preview to observe the silhouette curves
automatically created at all edges of the mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 14
38. Notice that some adjustments need to be made to the automatic parting line
curves.
39. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Slides.
 Select the slider volume from the graphics window.
 Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 15
40. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Select the Chains tab.

 Select chain 4–1 and click Lower to move the curve from the upper edge to the
lower edge of the hole.
 Click OK from the Loop Selection dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 16

Enlarge Image

Figure 17
41. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box to complete the parting line.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 18

42. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

43. Click Skirt Surface from the Surfacing group to create an automatic parting
surface.
44. Select the workpiece.
45. Select the silhouette curve.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 19
46. Click Done from the menu manager.
47. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension.
48. In the Extension Control dialog box, select the Extension Directions tab.
 Click Add.
 Press CTRL and select the two vertices.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 20
49. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
50. Click Done from the menu manager.
51. Query-select the left surface of the workpiece as the normal plane.
52. Click Okay from the menu manager.
53. Click OK to close the Extension Control dialog box.
54. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

55. Click OK from the Controls group to complete the parting surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 21

Step 5. Create the mold components.

56. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group to split the workpiece into mold volumes.
57. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager.
58. Select the slider and click OK from the Select dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 22
59. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
60. In the Properties dialog box, type main_vol as the Name of the first volume and
press ENTER.
61. In the Properties dialog box, type slider_vol as the Name of the second volume
and press ENTER.

62. Click Volume Split to split the main volume into core and cavity inserts.
63. Click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done .
64. In the Search Tool dialog box, do the following:
 Select Quilt: F11(MAIN_VOL) from the list of items found.
 Click Add Item to add the selected quilt to the list of items selected.
 Click Close.
65. Select the parting surface (you may have to use query select) and click OK from
the Select dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 23
66. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
67. In the Properties dialog box, type core as the Name of the first volume (the lower
half) and press ENTER.
68. In the Properties dialog box, type cavity as the Name of the second volume (the
upper half) and press ENTER.

69. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in
the Components group.
70. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, press CTRL and select CAVITY,
CORE, and SLIDER.
 Click OK.
71. Notice that the mold components appear as individual solid parts in the model
tree.

Enlarge Image

Figure 24
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

72. In the model tree, right-click CORE.PRT and select Open .

Enlarge Image

Figure 25

73. Click Close .

74. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

75. Click Mold Display from the Visibility group.

76. Select the Mold tab.
77. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, press CTRL and select CAMERA,
CAMERA_MOLD_WRK, and CORE from the Visible Components list and click
Blank.
 Click Parting surface as the Filter.
 Select PART_SURF_1 and click Blank.
 Click Volume as the Filter.
 Select SLIDER_VOL and click Blank.
 Click OK.

78. In the model tree, right-click SILH_CURVE_1 and select Hide .

Step 6. Create a runner mold feature.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

79. Click Runner from the Production Features group.

80. Click Half Round from the menu manager.
81. Type 3 as the runner diameter and press ENTER.
82. Query-select the bottom surface as the Sketching Plane and click Okay >
Default from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 26

83. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

84. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT and the top and bottom edges as references,
and click Close from the References dialog box.

85. Click Line Chain and sketch two lines of equal length.

86. Click One-by-One and edit the length to 29.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 27

87. Click OK .
88. Press CTRL+D and select CAVITY.PRT as the intersected component.
89. Click OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.
90. Click OK from the Runner dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 28
91. In the model tree, right-click CORE.PRT and select Unblank.

Step 7. Fill and open the mold.

92. Click Create Molding from the Components group to create the molding.
93. Type camera_molding as the Part name and press ENTER.
94. Press ENTER to accept the default Mold Part Common Name.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 29

95. Click Mold Opening from the Analysis group to perform a mold-opening
analysis.
96. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager.
97. Select SLIDER.PRT.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 30
98. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
99. Select the edge to define the direction of the move.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 31
100. Type -100 as the translation value and press ENTER.
101. Click Done from the menu manager.
102. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager.
103. Select CAVITY.PRT.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 32
104. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
105. Select the edge to define the direction of the move.

Enlarge Image

Figure 33
106. Type 100 as the translation value and press ENTER.
107. Click Done from the menu manager.
108. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager.
109. Select CORE.PRT.

Enlarge Image
Figure 34
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

110. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

111. Select the edge to define the direction of the move.

Enlarge Image
Figure 35
112. Type -100 as the translation value and press ENTER.
113. Click Done from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 36
114. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
115. Click in the background to de-select all items.

116. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.

117. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save the model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

118. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All , and
click OK to erase the model from memory.

This completes the procedure.

Understanding Mold Theory

Understanding Manufacturing Mold Theory

From a manufacturing point of view, in its simplest form, a mold consists of a core
and cavity which are split at a parting line. The core is the convex feature side of
the mold that enters an opposing cavity when the mold is closed. The cavity is
the concave feature side of the mold into which an opposing core enters when
the mold is closed. An example of a mold core and cavity is shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Mold Core and Cavity
The void between the closed core and cavity is filled with a material such as plastic.
This material-filled void becomes the resulting part when it solidifies.
For the material to find its way into the void, there must be various chambers and
paths created in the mold. These chambers are defined as follows:
 Sprues – The route the plastic material takes from the point where it enters the
mold until it reaches the runners. When solidified, it remains attached to the part
via one or more runners and is typically removed in finishing.
 Runners and gates – Channels machined into the mold that direct the plastic
material from the sprue into the mold cavity.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

In Figure 3, you can see the sprue, runners, and gates attached to the four
molded pucks.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Sprue and Runner Design
Once the material solidifies, the part can be removed from the mold. To aid in
ejecting the part, mold components called ejector pins are often designed into the
mold. The sizes and arrangement of the pins are selected to minimize the impact
on the part design.

Understanding CAD Mold Theory

From a CAD point of view, a designer typically hands off a completed or nearly
completed Creo Parametric design model to a mold designer. The mold designer
then takes the design model and uses it to create a Reference model within Creo
Parametric's Mold mode. The mold designer uses the Reference model to create
the resulting mold core and cavity components which create the void of the
Reference model. The mold core and cavity components split at a location called
the parting surface, which the mold designer must determine.
Once the mold designer creates the mold components in Creo Parametric's Mold
mode, he or she can use the Expert Moldbase Extension to create the entire
moldbase layout.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Moldbase Layout Created in EMX

The Expert Moldbase Extension, or EMX, uses a 2-D process-driven GUI to guide
the mold designer toward the optimal design. It uses a catalog of standard
components (DME, HASCO, FUTABA, PROGRESSIVE, STARK, and so on), or
customized components. Figure 1 shows a completed moldbase that was
developed with the Expert Moldbase Extension.
Mold Design using Creo Parametric focuses only on the creation of the mold
components and does not cover the Expert Moldbase Extension.

Preparing Design Models for the Mold

Process
Even though the design model you receive may be a valid design model, you
may not be able to use the model to create a robust mold. The following items
are typically required of the design model to create a robust mold and part:
 Draft — Facilitates the removal of the part from the mold.
 Uniform thickness — Areas of a part that are thicker than others can result in sink
zones or warping when cooling occurs.
 Ribs — Add strength and rigidity to the molded part.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Ejector pin “pads” — Sufficient material is needed for the full diameter of an
ejector pin at the location where it pushes against the resulting part to eject it
from the mold.
These items may not be present in the design model when you receive it
because the design engineer does not know where the parting surface or ejector
pins will be located in the mold.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Original Design Model
Therefore, you must prepare the design model for the mold process by adding the
necessary features needed to make a mold from the model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Design Model Prepared for Molding

Guidelines for Proper Design Model Preparation

The following guidelines indicate how to properly prepare a design model for
molding.
 Try to create models that are of uniform thickness to prevent sink zones or
warping in the resulting molded part.
 Create ribs that are approximately half the model's wall thickness to prevent sink.
Apply draft to the rib walls if they are “vertical” faces. Vertical faces are those that
are vertical with respect to how the mold opens. In Figure 2, two ribs have been
created and draft has been applied.
 Be aware of the need to accommodate ejector pins in your design model for
proper ejection from the mold. Create ejector pin “pads” at these locations in the
model where the ejector pins push against the model to eject it. In Figure 2, four
ejector pin pads have been created.
 Apply draft in the proper direction at least 0.5 degrees on all “vertical” faces. Draft
has been applied to all faces that are vertical with respect to how the mold opens.
 When creating Draft features in Creo Parametric, either reorder them to be
created before any related rounds or insert them before the rounds. This practice
results in a more robust Creo Parametric model. In Figure 2, the draft has been
inserted before the adjacent rounds.

Creating Profile Rib Features

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to an
extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing Open Sketches

The rib also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded.
After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo Parametric
automatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model. The
system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness can be
applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Editing the Side that Thickens

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Flipping Which Side the Rib is Created

The Profile Rib enables you to create rib features in less time than it would
take for you to create and sketch a protrusion.

Creating Profile Rib Features

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Rib\Profile folder and click OK
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click File > Open and double-click RIB.PRT.

Task 1. Create profile rib features on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Profile Rib from the Rib types drop-down menu in the Engineering
group.
3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.
4. Drag the handle and edit the width to 75.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

5. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

 Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to match the curved surface which is adjacent
to the sketch.

6. Click Profile Rib .

7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2 .
8. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.
9. Drag the handle and edit the width to 25. The rib is centered about the sketch.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

10. Click Change Thickness Option from the dashboard. The rib moves to the
left of the sketch.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

11. Click Change Thickness Option again. The rib moves to the right of the
sketch.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

12. Click Complete Feature .

13. Reorient the model.

14. Click Profile Rib .

15. Select RIB_SKETCH-3 . The rib is above the sketch.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
16. Click the arrow in the graphics window. The rib is now on the bottom of the
sketch.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

17. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Creating Profile Rib Features

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Rib\Profile folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click ENG_BLOCK.PRT.

Objectives
 Create profile rib features.

Scenario
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Rib features are used to add structural strength to parts. Product testing has
indicated that the engine block part needs an additional rib to strengthen it
against premature failure. Your assignment is to add the additional profile rib
feature.

Task 1. Create a profile rib on ENG_BLOCK.PRT .

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select datum plane RIB and click Sketch from the Datum group.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

4. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

5. Disable Plane Display .

6. Click References from the Setup group.

 Select the three silhouette edges shown (highlighted in green in the following
figure) as references, resulting in a total of five specified references.
 Click Close in the References dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. Zoom in and sketch, as shown in the following figure:

 Right-click and select Line Chain . Sketch a horizontal line starting from the
diagonal reference, stopping short of the vertical reference.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent End . Start the arc on the
unfinished end of the sketched line, and finish on the vertical reference. Middle-
click to stop sketching arcs.

 Right-click and select Dimension . Select the left end of the arc and the
horizontal reference, and place the first dimension.
 Type 2 and press ENTER.
 Select the horizontal line you sketched and the horizontal reference, and place
the second dimension.
 Type 5 and press ENTER.

 Click One-by-One from the Operations group and edit the arc radius to 6.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

8. Click OK from the ribbon.

9. Middle-click and drag to orient the model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

10. With the sketch still selected, select Profile Rib from the Rib types drop-
down menu. Select the References tab. Click Flip and then edit the thickness to

2. Click Change Thickness Option as necessary to set the rib feature

symmetric about the sketch.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

11. Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

12. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

13. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current > Yes to erase the model from
memory.

This completes the exercise.

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing Sketch

You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to
create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split object, it
becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You can also
define a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface, Creo
Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to the
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for the draft
in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Draft Split at Sketch

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Draft\Split-Sketch folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click DRAFT_SPLIT-SKETCH.PRT .

Task 1. Create a draft split at a sketch.

1. Disable all Datum display types.

2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu.

 Select the large, front surface containing the sketch.
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges.
 Select the top surface of the left rectangular “step.”
4. Drag the angle so the upper draft portion goes into the model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
5. In the dashboard, select the Split tab.
 Select Split by split object as the Split option.
 Select sketch SPLIT_SKETCH.
 Select Draft second side only as the Side option.
6. Drag the angle so the draft goes into the model.

7. Click Preview Feature .

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

8. Click Resume Feature .

9. In the dashboard, select the Split tab.

 Select Draft first side only as the Side option.

10. Click Preview Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

11. Click Resume Feature .

12. In the dashboard, select the Split tab.

 Select Draft sides independently as the Side option.
 Edit both draft angles to 7 so the draft goes into the model.

13. Click Complete Feature .

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

This completes the procedure.

Creating Drafts Split at Curve

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – The Datum Curve

You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve. This causes the material
at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was used as the
draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create the resulting
geometry in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Draft Split at Datum Curve

If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate pull
direction reference.

Creating Drafts Split at Curve

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Draft\Split-Curve folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click DRAFT_SPLIT-CURVE.PRT .

Task 1. Create a draft split at a curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down list.

 Select the front surface.
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges.
 Select the curve.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
4. Right-click and select Pull Direction.
 Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
5. Edit the draft angle to 10.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

6. In the dashboard, click Reverse Angle .

7. Click Preview Feature .

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

8. Click Resume Feature .

9. In the dashboard, select the Split tab.

 Select Split by draft hinge as the Split option.
 Select Draft sides dependently as the Side option.

10. Click Reverse Angle .

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

11. Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
12. Notice that this draft has removed material from the top and bottom of the model.

This completes the procedure.

Creating Drafts Split at Surface

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Draft Split at Surface
You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing material at the
surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you to
select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split the
draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge locations. In
Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once this split object
was defined, a second draft hinge was able to be added, as shown in Figure 3.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Splitting the Draft at Surface

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Selecting Multiple Draft Hinges

Creating Drafts Split at Surface

Before you begin
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Draft\Split-Surface folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click DRAFT_SPLIT-SURFACE.PRT .

Task 1. Create a draft split at a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down list.

 Select the front surface.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges.
 Select an edge on the front of the top surface.
 Press SHIFT, cursor over an adjacent edge, right-click to query, and select the
upper Tangent chain.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
4. Right-click and select Pull Direction.
 Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
5. Edit the draft angle to 10.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
6. In the dashboard, select the Split tab.
 Select Split by split object as the Split option.
 Select the surface quilt.
7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

8. Click Reverse Angle for the lower draft angle.

9. In the dashboard, select the References tab.

10. Right-click and select Draft Hinges.
 Press CTRL and select an edge on the front of the bottom surface.
 Press SHIFT, cursor over an adjacent edge, right-click to query, and select the
bottom Tangent Chain.
 The Draft hinges collector should contain two Tangent Chains.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

11. Click Complete Feature .

12. In the model tree, right-click QUILT and select Hide .

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
13. Note that this draft has added material to the center of the model.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Design Models Theory

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

You can perform analyses on design models before creating the mold model.
Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is acceptable for mold
creation. You can perform the following types of analyses on design models:
 Draft check

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Draft Check

 Thickness check
 Section Thickness check

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Section Thickness Check

You usually use these analysis tools before the mold is created, but you can also
use them at almost any point during the mold process, including:
 Parting line creation – If the parting line location is modified slightly you can
perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted.
 Parting surface creation – Again, if the parting surface is modified you can
perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Mold component creation – You can perform a thickness check on components

other than the design model. You can perform a thickness check on the core or
cavity component to verify that it has sufficient thickness to handle the stress
during the molding part creation.

Performing a Draft Check

You can use draft checking to determine whether the design model has the
correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles to facilitate the mold-opening
process as well as the removal of the molding component. To perform the draft

check, click Draft from the Analysis group if in Mold mode, or click Draft

from the Inspect Geometry group in the Analysis tab if in Part mode.
You must specify the following references to perform a draft check:
 Surface – Specifies the surfaces for which the draft analysis is to be run. You can
select surfaces or quilts individually, or select the part node in the model tree to
select all solid geometry.
 Direction – Specifies the direction to be used for the draft analysis. Usually, the
pull direction is the direction in which the mold opens. If in a mold model, the
system automatically uses the pull direction by default, but you can also specify
your own direction reference.
You must also specify the following options:
 Draft angle – Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check for.
 Sample – Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated. Options
include Quality, Number, and Step.
 Quality – Adjusts the quality of the plot.
When you perform a Draft analysis, the system produces a color plot of the draft
angles. Based on the coloring, you can identify areas that do not have sufficient
draft angles, or incorrect direction draft angles.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Incorrectly Drafted Pegs

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

There are two different types of color plots you can display:

 3-Color Plot – Displays a three color plot in the graphics window. Sufficient
positive draft angles appear in blue, sufficient negative draft angles appear in red,
and insufficient angles appear in white.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Peg Geometry Updated for Correct Draft

 Rainbow Plot – Displays the color scale as a rainbow plot.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Rainbow Plot

You can specify the number of colors to display, and whether the color scale is
shown as continuous or non-continuous.

Performing a Draft Check

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Analysis\Draft_Check folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click DRAFT-CHECK.PRT.

Task 1. Perform a draft check on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.

3. Click Mold/Cast from the Engineering group.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

4. Click Draft from the Analysis group.

5. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT from the model tree.
6. In the Draft Analysis dialog box, clear the Use the pull direction check box.
7. Right-click in the graphics window and select Direction Collector.
8. Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
9. Edit the draft angle to 3 if necessary.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
10. Rotate the model so that you can view the pegs underneath.
11. Notice that there is positive draft on the pegs and it needs to be negative.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
12. In the Draft Analysis dialog box, click Flip.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
13. Notice that the colors and angle values have reversed.
14. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.

15. In the model tree, right-click Draft 3 and select Edit .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

16. Edit the draft angle to -3 and click twice in the background to finish editing the
model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

17. Click Draft .

18. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT from the model tree.
19. In the Draft Analysis dialog box, clear the Use the pull direction check box.
20. Right-click in the graphics window and select Direction Collector.
21. Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
22. Notice that the pegs are now drafted the correct way for molding.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
23. In the Draft Analysis dialog box, edit the Draft angle to 4

24. In the Color Scale dialog box, click Expand .

 Edit the number of colors to 3.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

25. Click Rainbow Plot .

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

26. Click 3-Color Plot .

27. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Performing a Section Thickness Check

Performing a Section Thickness Check on a Model

You can perform a thickness check on a model by selecting the Analysis tab in

the ribbon, and then clicking Section Thickness from the Model Report
group. You can measure thickness using either of the following methods:
 Select one or more planes through which the thickness is measured. You can
press CTRL to select multiple planar references.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Displaying Section Thickness Cross-Sections Through Selected

Planes
 Select references to create incremental cross-section slices through which
thickness is measured.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Displaying Section Thickness Cross-Sections Through Slices

To create these incremental slices, you must specify the following references:
o From slices – This specifies the start point of slicing. You can select either
vertices or datum points for this reference.
o To slices – This specifies the end point of slicing. Again, you can select either
vertices or datum points for this reference.
o Direction – This specifies the direction of slicing. If necessary, you can click the
direction arrow in the graphics window to flip the direction of slicing to point
between the From Slices and To Slices references.

Once you have specified the correct slicing references, you can specify the
following options:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

o Use number of slices – This specifies the number of slices to be created between
the selected references.
o Offset – The incremental offset value that separates each cross-sectional slice.
The Slices reference collectors become grayed out if you select a Plane reference to perform the
thickness check.

You can configure the system to perform the following two thickness checks at
each specified reference:
 Maximum – Checks for maximum thickness. The system performs a maximum
thickness check based on the value you have specified.
 Minimum – Checks for minimum thickness. The system performs a minimum
thickness check based on the value you have specified.
The Thickness dialog box displays the results for each thickness cross-section
location. When you select a result in the dialog box, the thickness cross-section
displays in the graphics window. The Thickness dialog box also indicates whether
the thickness at each cross-section surpassed the minimum or maximum
thicknesses specified.

Performing a Section Thickness Check in a Manufacturing

Model

You can also perform a section thickness check in the mold model by clicking

Section Thickness from the Analysis group in the Mold tab. Because the
section thickness check occurs within the context of an assembly, you must
specify the part that the thickness check is to be performed on.
Once the part is specified, the thickness check is similar to that of the model
analysis thickness check, although the interface is slightly different. You can
either select one or more planes through which to measure the thickness, or you
can have the system create slices based on selected references. The system can
check for both maximum and minimum thickness based on the specified
thickness value you provide, and the results appear in the Model Analysis dialog
box similar to those of the Thickness dialog box.

Performing a Section Thickness Check

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Analysis\Section-Thickness_Check folder and
click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click THICKNESS-CHECK.PRT.

Task 1. Perform a thickness check on a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.
3. Click the Model Report group drop-down menu and select Section Thickness

.
4. Press CTRL and select datum planes FRONT, TOP, and RIGHT.
5. In the Thickness dialog box, edit the Maximum value to 0.2 and click Preview.
 Notice that the #1 and #2 results have an area of thickness greater than 0.2.
 Select the #2 result, and notice that it highlights in the graphics window.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. In the Thickness dialog box, click Show All.
 Notice that all three results highlight in the graphics window.
 Click Clear.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
7. In the Thickness dialog box, right-click in the Planes collector and select Remove
All.
 Click in the From slices collector and select datum point PNT0.
 Select datum point PNT1 as the To slices reference.
 Select datum plane RIGHT for the Direction collector.
 Edit the Offset to 2.
 Clear the Maximum check box.
 Select the Minimum check box and edit the value to 0.15.
 Click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
8. Click Show All.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
9. Click OK from the Thickness dialog box.

Task 2. Perform a thickness check in a mold cavity.

10. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click
MFG_THICKNESS.ASM.

11. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Section Thickness .
12. Select the model from the graphics window.
13. In the Model Analysis dialog box, click Slices for the Setup Thickness Check.
 Select datum point PNT2 as the Start Point.
 Select datum point PNT3 as the End Point.
 Select datum plane MAIN_PARTING_PLN as the Slice Direction.
 Click Okay from the menu manager to accept the upward direction.
 Select the Use number of slices check box and edit the value to 6 slices.
 Edit the Slice Offset to 1.
 Clear the Max check box and select the Min check box, editing its value to 0.3.
 Click Compute.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

This completes the procedure.

Performing a Thickness Check

You can perform a 3-D thickness check on a part model to check for maximum or
minimum thickness violations. The thickness check reduces the time to analyze
wall thickness of complicated parts.

The Thickness option is available in multiple places in the Creo Parametric

user interface:
 In Part mode:
o In the Analysis tab, within the Model Report group.
 In Mold mode:
o In the Mold tab, within the Analysis group.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

o In the Analysis tab, within the Model Report group.

o In the Analysis tab, within the Mold Analysis group.
In the Measure dialog box, you can measure thickness within all solid geometry
or individually selected surfaces. You can specify the following:
 Minimum thickness value – Checks for minimum thickness. The system performs
a minimum thickness check based on the value you have specified. Areas that
violate the minimum thickness specified (areas where the thickness is less than
the specified value) highlight in the model in purple.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing Min and Max Thickness Violations

 Maximum thickness value – Checks for maximum thickness. The system
performs a maximum thickness check based on the value you have specified.
Areas that violate the maximum thickness specified (areas where the thickness is
more than the specified value) highlight in the model in red.
 Minimum thickness color – Specify a different minimum thickness color than the
default purple.
 Neutral color – Specify a different neutral color than the default gray.
 Maximum thickness color – Specify a different maximum thickness color than the
default red.
 Tolerance – Specify the allowable error for the calculation.
 Use post-processing – Selecting this check box causes the system to post
process the results to improve quality and accuracy.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing Post Processed Min and Max Thickness Violations

Minimum thickness results display in the graphics window within an on-screen
panel. You can drag this panel as well as collapse it. You can restore it by
clicking its on-screen icon.
You can also view minimum thickness results by expanding the Results area of
the Measure dialog box. You can copy and paste the contents of this Results
table to other programs such as spreadsheet applications.

You can save the measurement by clicking Save Analysis from the Measure
dialog box. Save the measurement as either of the following types:
 Feature – Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the model tree.
 Analysis – Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You can specify
a unique name for the measurement analysis so you can easily identify it at a

later time. You can retrieve the saved analysis by clicking Saved Analysis
from the Manage group in the Analysis tab.

Measurement Options

Within the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clicking Measure
Options . The following options are available:
 Units by Model – Units are the same as those of the model.
 Length Units – Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list.
 Decimal Places – Specify the number of decimal places displayed for
measurements.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Show Feature Tab – Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box,
enabling you to specify regeneration order as well as create parameters for a
given measurement.
 Use automatic compute – Automatically computes the new measurement if
different references are selected for measuring.
 Panel display – You can toggle panels to either hide or display them in the
graphics window. You can also toggle panels by collapsing them or expanding
them.

Performing a Thickness Check

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Analysis\3-D_Thickness folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click 3-D_THICKNESS.PRT.

Task 1. Perform a thickness check on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

3. Click Thickness from the Model Report group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
4. Select the 3-D geometry in the graphics window.
5. In the Measure dialog box, edit the Minimum value to 0.18.
 Edit the Maximum value to 0.50.
 Click Compute.
 Drag the panel approximately as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
 The areas shaded in purple are thinner than the minimum specified value of 0.18. The areas shaded in
red are thicker than the maximum specified value of 0.5.

6. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use post-processing check box.
 Click Compute.
 Notice that the accuracy has improved in terms of color-coding the model areas
that violate the minimum and maximum thicknesses.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

This completes the procedure.

Creating New Mold Models

A mold model is the model you work on while in Mold Cavity Design mode, or
Mold mode. The mold model, which has a file extension of .asm, contains the
following:
 A reference model.
 One or more workpieces that represent the overall size of cavity inserts.
 Several mold components that represent cavity inserts.
 One molding component that represents the product of the molding process.
The remainder of this course focuses on the creation of these items.

You can create new mold models within Creo Parametric either by using File >

New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of the mold and decide
whether to use a default template or a template at all. Unless you select the
Empty template, the new mold displays in the graphics window with some default
datum features.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1 – New Mold Model Tree

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – New Mold Model

Using Templates

You should create new mold models using a template. Mold templates are similar
to part and assembly templates in that they enable you to create a new mold with
predefined general information. Your company has probably created customized
templates, as they contain your company's standards. Using a template to create
a new mold is beneficial because it means that regardless of who created it, the
mold contains the same consistent set of information, including:
 Datums – Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and a default
coordinate system, all named appropriately.
 Default Pull Direction – The direction in which the mold opens.
 Layers – When every mold, part, and assembly contains the same layers, it is
easier to manage both the layers and items on the layer.
 Units – Most companies have a company standard for units in their molds.
Creating every mold with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not
made.
 Parameters – Every mold can have the same standard metadata information.
 View Orientations – Having every mold contain the same standard view
orientations aids the molding process.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Modifying the Default Pull Direction

The default pull direction is visible on the model as a double set of arrows, as
shown in Figure 2. It is used as a default direction for all mold-specific features
and analysis depending on the pull direction. You can toggle the pull direction

display on and off by clicking Pull Direction Display from the In Graphics
toolbar. You can also change the direction of the default pull direction by clicking

Pull Direction from the Design Features group in the ribbon. The reference
you select causes the pull direction to become perpendicular to that reference.
Keep in mind that if you modify the default pull direction within a mold model
created using a template, you should rename the datum planes appropriately.
The pull direction value is not parametric. This means that features built before resetting the default pull
direction use the earlier direction value. They are not updated when you reset the default pull direction.
Therefore, it is recommended that you do not modify the pull direction after a certain point in the mold
process.

Creating New Mold Models

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\New folder and click OK

Task 1. Create a new mold model by selecting a template.

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.

 Select Manufacturing as the Type and Mold cavity as the Sub-type.
 Edit the Name to NEW_MOLD.
 Clear the Use default template check box.
 Click OK.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. In the New File Options dialog box, click Browse.

 Double-click MMNS_MFG_MOLD.ASM.
 Click OK.

3. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
4. Notice that an assembly of the same name as the mold cavity is created in the
model tree.
5. Explore the default datum features created in the graphics window and model
tree.
6. Notice the PULL DIRECTION.

7. Click Pull Direction Display from the In Graphics toolbar to disable the pull
direction display.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

8. Click Pull Direction Display again to toggle it back on.

9. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree. Notice the default
layers.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

10. Click Show and select Model Tree.

11. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog
box.
12. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row. Notice the units that are
set.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
13. Click Close > Close.

14. Click Saved Orientations from the In Graphics toolbar. Notice the default
view orientations.
15. Select view orientation FRONT.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
16. Notice that the PULL DIRECTION for the mold points upward from the parting
plane.

17. Click Saved Orientations and select Standard Orientation.

18. Click Pull Direction from the Design Features group in the ribbon.
19. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT and click OK from the Pull Direction dialog
box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

Task 2. Create a new mold model by selecting a different template.

20. Click New .

 Select Manufacturing as the Type and Mold cavity as the Sub-type.
 Edit the Name to NEW_MOLD_ENGLISH.
 Clear the Use default template check box.
 Click OK.
21. In the New File Options dialog box, select the inlbs_mfg_mold template.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
22. Again, notice the datum features and PULL DIRECTION.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
23. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.
24. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row. Notice the units that are
set.

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
25. Click Close > Close.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Model Accuracy

One of the most important factors affecting the mold design process is model
accuracy. Creo Parametric provides the following types of accuracy settings:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Relative – This type of accuracy is specified as a fraction of the longest diagonal

of the bounding box of a model. The default relative accuracy is 0.0012.
 Absolute – This type of accuracy improves the matching of models of different
sizes or different accuracies (for example, imported models created on another
system). To avoid potential problems when adding new features to a model, it is
recommended that you set the reference model to absolute accuracy before
adding additional parts to the model. Absolute accuracy is useful when you are
doing the following:
o Copying geometry from one mold to another during core operations.
o Designing models for manufacturing and mold design.
o Matching accuracy of imported geometry to its destination model.
You can match the accuracies of a set of models in one of the two following
ways:
 Give them all the same absolute accuracies.
 Designate the smallest model as the base model, and assign its accuracy to the
other models.

Automatically Controlling Accuracy

You can perform the following steps to automatically set the correct accuracy
when creating mold models:
 Set the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes.
 Create a new mold model. It receives a default (absolute) accuracy value.
 Add the first reference model. If a discrepancy exists between the assembly
model accuracy and reference model accuracy, the system issues a warning and
prompts you to confirm changing the assembly model accuracy, as shown in
Figure 1.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Confirmation for Automatically Changing Accuracy

If you accept, then Creo Parametric switches the assembly model accuracy from
relative to absolute, and sets it to the value corresponding to the accuracy of the
reference model. If you do not accept, the system warns you that there is an
accuracy conflict, and generates a text file with a *.acc file extension in the working
directory.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Create the mold workpiece using the automatic workpiece creation functionality.
The accuracy of the workpiece is automatically set to be the same as the
accuracy of the assembly model.

Implications and Guidelines of Changing Accuracy

When you change the accuracy of a model you are changing the computational
accuracy of geometry calculations. The accuracy of a mold model is relative to
the size of the resultant molding component. The valid range for accuracy is 0.01
to 0.0001, and the default value is 0.0012. However, the configuration file option,
accuracy_lower_bound, can override the lower boundary of this range. The
specified values for the lower boundary must be between 0.000001 and 0.0001.
If you increase the accuracy, the regeneration time also increases. Use the
default accuracy unless you need to increase it. In general, you should set the
accuracy to a value less than half the ratio of the length of the smallest edge on
the model to the length of the largest diagonal of a box that would contain the
model. Use the default accuracy until you have a reason not to do so.

Situations for Changing Accuracy

The following are situations that may cause you to have to change accuracy:
 Placing a small feature on a model.
 Intersecting two models of very different size. For the two models to be
compatible, they must have the same absolute accuracy. To achieve this,
estimate each model size, and multiply each by its respective current accuracy. If
the results differ, enter a value for the accuracy of the models that yields the
same results for each. You might need to increase the mold accuracy of the
larger model by entering a smaller decimal number. For example, if the size of
the smaller model is 100 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is
1. If the size of the larger model is 1000 and the accuracy is .01, the product of
these numbers is 10. Change the accuracy of the larger model to .001 to yield the
same product.
When an accuracy conflict exists, the system warns you in the Message Log and
generate a *.acc file that is saved in the working directory. You can view this text
file to determine where the conflict exists and modify the accuracies accordingly.
The contents of an accuracy file are shown in Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Viewing an Accuracy Conflict

Analyzing Model Accuracy

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Accuracy folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MFG_ACCURACY.ASM.

Task 1. Modify the accuracy of models in a mold model.

 The purpose of this procedure is to show you how to change accuracy manually. If you specify the
reference part and use automatic workpiece creation during the mold process, you are automatically
prompted to change accuracy.

2. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Notice the warning in the Message Log stating that there is an accuracy conflict.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1

4. Click Folder Browser from the Navigator and click Working Directory .

 Click in the right, empty portion of the address bar to highlight its contents.
 Press END, type mfg_accuracy.acc, and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
5. Review the accuracy conflict report for the manufacturing assembly.
6. Click Show Browser to collapse the browser.

7. Select Model Tree from the Navigator.

8. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
 Click Add.
 Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
 Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.
9. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog
box.
10. In the Materials section, click change in the Accuracy row.
11. In the Accuracy dialog box, select Copying value from model and click Browse.
12. Double-click MFG_ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the Open dialog box.
13. Click Regenerate from the Accuracy dialog box.
14. Notice that the accuracy has been changed to Absolute 0.0046.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
15. Click Close from the Model Properties dialog box.

16. Right-click ACCURACY_WRK.PRT and select Open .

17. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.
18. In the Materials section, click change in the Accuracy row.
19. In the Accuracy dialog box, select Copying value from model and click Browse.
20. Double-click MFG_ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the Open dialog box.
21. Click Regenerate.
22. Notice that the accuracy has been changed to Absolute 0.0046.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
23. Click Close from the Model Properties dialog box.

24. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to

MFG_ACCURACY.ASM.

25. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

26. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.
27. Click Working Directory and double-click MFG_ACCURACY.ASM to open it.
28. Notice that there is no longer an accuracy conflict in the Message Log. All
components in the mold manufacturing model are set to the same absolute
accuracy value.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

This completes the procedure.

Locating the Reference Model

Reference Model Background

The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Reference Model Located into Mold Model

The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes the mold
cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage that
are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model contains
design elements that require post-molding machining. These elements should be
changed on the reference model to suit the mold design process.

Locating the Reference Model

Locating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting the
reference model into the mold model, and is the most versatile of the three. The
reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a
conventional part model, regardless of the method used to insert it.

You can use Locate Reference Model to assemble a pre-existing model as

the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you to further
select a pre-defined Layout and Orientation for the reference model.
When locating the reference model, you can specify the Reference model type:
 Merge by reference – Creo Parametric copies design model geometry into the
reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the geometry, datum
planes, and layers are copied from the design model. If a layer with one or more
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

datum planes associated with it exists in a design model, the layer, its name,
display status, and the datum planes are copied from the design model to the
reference model. Any changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the
original design model. The default name for the new reference model created
with this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. For example, if the mold
model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is
CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design model
automatically propagate to the reference model.
 Same model – Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference model.
The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes made to this
reference model do affect the design model, as you are actually modifying the
original design model. As a result, you cannot rename this reference model when
it is the same model as the original design model.
 Inherited – The reference model inherits all geometry and feature information
from the design model using an External Inheritance feature. You can specify the
geometry and the feature data that you want to modify on the inherited reference
model without changing the original design model. Inheritance provides greater
freedom to modify the reference model without changing the design model. Any
changes made to the reference model do not affect the design model. Similar to
the Merge by Reference method, the default name for the new reference model
created with this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. Again, any
changes made to the original design model automatically propagate to the
reference model.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2 – Model Trees for Merge by Reference, Same Model, and Inherited
Reference Model Types
If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confirm the
accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model accuracy
to the reference model accuracy.
When the reference model is located into the mold model, the resulting geometry
in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method used to create
the reference model. You must expand the model tree to determine the method
used.

Locating the Reference Model

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Reference-Model_Locate folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click REF-MODEL_MERGE.ASM.

Task 1. Locate the reference model as a merge model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
 Click Add.
 Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
 Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.

3. In the ribbon, select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

5. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Merge by reference as the
Reference model type.
 Notice the Design model.
 Edit the Reference model Name to BUTTON_REF and click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. Click OK from the Layout dialog box.
7. Click OK from the Warning dialog box to change the accuracy.
8. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2

9. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.

10. Expand BUTTON_REF.PRT in the model tree.
11. Notice that the reference model only contains an external merge feature.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

Task 2. Locate the reference model as the same model.

12. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click REF-
MODEL_SAME.ASM.

13. Click Locate Reference Model .

14. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.
15. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Same model as the Reference
model type.
 Notice the Reference model Name, and that the field is grayed out.
 Click OK.
16. Click OK from the Layout dialog box.
17. Click OK from the Warning dialog box.
18. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

19. Click Regenerate .

20. Expand BUTTON.PRT in the model tree.
21. Notice that the reference model is the original model.
2. Task 3. Locate the reference model as an inheritance.

1. Click Open and double-click REF-MODEL_INHERITED.ASM.

2. Click Locate Reference Model .

3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.
4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Inherited as the Reference
model type.
 Edit the Reference model Name to BUTTON_REF_I and click OK.
5. Click OK from the Layout dialog box.
6. Click OK from the Warning dialog box.
7. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

8. Click Regenerate .
9. Expand BUTTON_REF_I.PRT in the model tree.
10. Notice that the reference model only contains an external inheritance feature.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6

This completes the procedure.

Assembling the Reference Model

Reference Model Background

The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference Model in the Model Tree
The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. The
reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes the mold
cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage that
are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model contains
design elements that require post-molding machining. These elements should be
changed on the reference model to suit the mold design process.

Assembling the Reference Model

Assembling the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting
the reference model into the mold model. The reference model icon that displays
in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part model, regardless of
the method used to insert it.

You can use Assemble Reference Model to assemble a pre-existing

model as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you to
use conventional Assembly mode placement constraints to assemble the
reference model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Assembling the Reference Model using Constraints

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Viewing the Assembled Reference Model
Unlike the Locate Reference Model option, you cannot further specify a Layout and
Orientation.
You can redefine the reference model, however, to specify a Layout and Orientation.

Similar to the Locate Reference Model option, you can specify the Reference
model type:
 Merge by reference – Creo Parametric copies design model geometry into the
reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the geometry, datum
planes, and layers are copied from the design model. If a layer with one or more
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

datum planes associated with it exists in a design model, the layer, its name,
display status, and the datum planes are copied from the design model to the
reference model. Any changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the
original design model. The default name for the new reference model created
with this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. For example, if the mold
model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is
CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design model
automatically propagate to the reference model.
 Same model – Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference model.
The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes made to this
reference model do affect the design model, as you are actually modifying the
original design model. As a result, you cannot rename this reference model when
it is the same model as the original design model.
 Inherited – The reference model inherits all geometry and feature information
from the design model using an External Inheritance feature. You can specify the
geometry and the feature data that you want to modify on the inherited reference
model without changing the original design model. Inheritance provides greater
freedom to modify the reference model without changing the design model. Any
changes made to the reference model do not affect the design model. Similar to
the Merge by Reference method, the default name for the new reference model
created with this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. Again, any
changes made to the original design model automatically propagate to the
reference model.
If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confirm the
accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model accuracy
to the reference model accuracy.
When the reference model is assembled into the mold model, the resulting
geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method used
to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to determine the
method used.

Assembling the Reference Model

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Reference-Model_Assemble folder and
click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click REF-MODEL_ASSEMBLE.ASM.

Task 1. Assemble the reference model using placement constraints.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
 Click Add.
 Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
 Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.

3. In the ribbon, select Assemble Reference Model from the Reference

Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.
5. Notice that you can now assemble the reference model using conventional
placement constraints.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
6. In the graphics window, select coordinate system MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the
assembly reference.
 Select coordinate system PRT_CSYS_DEF as the component reference.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2

7. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

8. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Merge by reference as the
Reference model type.
 Edit the Reference model Name to BUTTON_REF and click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
9. Click OK from the Warning dialog box to edit the accuracy.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Creating the Reference Model

Reference Model Background

The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference Model in the Model Tree

The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. The
reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes the mold
cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage that
are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model contains
design elements that require post-molding machining. These elements should be
changed on the reference model to suit the mold design process.

Creating the Reference Model

Creating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting the
reference model into the mold model and offers the least flexibility. The reference
model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional
part model, regardless of the method used to insert it.

You can use Create Reference Model to create a new model on-the-fly and
assemble it as the reference model into the mold model using conventional
Assembly mode placement constraints.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Assembling the Reference Model using Constraints

This option is similar to creating a new component in Assembly mode. In fact, the
same creation options are available:
 Copy from existing – Creates a copy of an existing model. This could be an
existing design model or an empty template of your company standards.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Reference Model Created from Empty Template

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Locate default datums – Creates the model and enables you to locate the default
datums in the assembly.
 Empty – Creates the model without geometry or datum features.
 Create features – Creates the model using existing assembly references.
With this method you cannot specify the Reference model type. There are also
no pre-defined options available for Layout or Orientation, and there are no
further locating options or accuracy matching.

Creating the Reference Model

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Reference-Model_Create folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click BUTTON.PRT.

Task 1. Create the reference model from an existing design model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Notice the model geometry.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

3. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

4. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
 Click Add.
 Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
 Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.

5. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click REF-
MODEL_COPY-FROM.ASM.

6. In the ribbon, select Create Reference Model from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
7. In the Create Component dialog box, edit the Name to BUTTON_REF.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2
8. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing as the Creation
Method.
 Click Browse.
 Double-click BUTTON.PRT.
 Click OK.
9. Notice that you can now assemble the reference model using conventional
placement constraints.
10. Notice that the geometry was copied from the BUTTON.PRT model.

11. Enable Csys Display .

12. In the graphics window, select coordinate system MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the
assembly reference.
 Select coordinate system PRT_CSYS_DEF as the component reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

13. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

Task 2. Create the reference model from an empty template.

14. Click Open and double-click REF-MODEL_CREATE.ASM.

15. Select Create Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

16. In the Create Component dialog box, edit the name to BUTTON_REF_NEW.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
17. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing as the Creation
Method.
 Click Browse.
 Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
 Click OK.
18. Notice that you can now assemble the reference model using conventional
placement constraints.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 5
19. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.

20. Click Complete Component .

 You could now activate the reference model and create geometry as desired.

This completes the procedure.

Redefining the Reference Model

You can redefine the reference model by selecting Locate Reference Model

from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model &
Workpiece group and then clicking Redefine from the menu manager. You can
redefine the following items related to the reference model:
 Reference model orientation – You can adjust the reference model origin and
orientation within the mold model. You can do this by either adjusting the
reference model coordinate system or the mold model's coordinate system.
 Mold cavity layout – You can adjust the quantity and layout of the mold cavities
created within the mold model.
 Mold cavity layout orientation – You can adjust the orientation of the mold cavities
created within the mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Layout Dialog Box when Redefining Reference Model

You cannot change the current reference model to a different reference model.

You can perform these functions on reference models that were located or assembled, but not reference
models that were directly created in the mold model.

Switching Reference Model Methods

If you have located or assembled the reference model using the Same Model
method, you cannot redefine the method to switch it to Merge by reference or
Inherited. Conversely, if you located or assembled the reference model using
either Merge by reference or Inherited, you cannot redefine the method to Same
Model. In either of these cases you must delete the reference model from the
mold model and recreate it.
You can switch the reference model creation method back and forth between
Merge by reference and Inheritance, however. You can do this by editing the
definition of the External Merge or External Inheritance feature within the
reference model, depending on the type of creation method used. You can then
toggle the inheritance on or off in the dashboard. Keep in mind that in switching
back and forth you will lose any geometry that was varied in the inheritance
feature, and the resulting geometry may change, potentially causing other
geometry to fail.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation

You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the mold model. When
you select the reference model to be added to the mold model, the system
selects a coordinate system from the reference model and assembles it to a
coordinate system from the mold model.

Modifying the Reference Model Orientation

You can modify the reference model orientation within the mold model either by
specifying a different mold layout coordinate system or by specifying a different
reference model coordinate system.
There are two different methods that you can use to specify a different coordinate
system in the reference model:
 Standard – Enables you to select a different, existing, coordinate system in the
reference model. A separate window opens that contains the reference model,
enabling you to select the coordinate system, as shown in Figure 1.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Using Standard Orientation
 Dynamic – A separate window opens that contains the reference model.
However, a new coordinate system called REF_ORIGIN is created in the
reference model, and you can dynamically reorient this coordinate system so that
it will line up properly with the mold layout coordinate system.
In the separate window that contains the reference model, the X, Y, and Z-
directions of the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system are displayed, and the positive
Z-direction is the same as the PULL DIRECTION in the mold model. Also, the
Parting Plane displays to show you a surface perpendicular to the pull direction.
Figure 2 shows the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system orientation and Parting
Plane and the resulting orientation in the mold model.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Using Dynamic Orientation

You can dynamically adjust the coordinate system orientation in the reference
model window, and the parting plane also adjusts dynamically. The following
options are available for adjusting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system orientation:
o Rotate – Enables you to rotate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system about the X,
Y, and Z axes, either by typing a value or by dragging a slider.
o Translate – Enables you to translate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system in the
X, Y, and Z directions, either by typing a value or by dragging a slider. You can
also click Midpoint to automatically translate the parting plane to a midpoint of the
model in that direction.
o Move to a point – Enables you to move the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system
origin to a specified point in the reference model. There are two options available:
 Selection – Enables you to select a vertex, datum point, or other coordinate
system as the new coordinate system origin.
 Model center – Moves the coordinate system origin to the model center.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

o Align an axis – Enables you to align the X, Y, or Z Axis of the REF_ORIGIN

coordinate system to a specified datum plane, curve, edge, axis, or other
coordinate system.

Reference Model Dynamic Orientation Options

When you are dynamically reorienting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system, the
following additional options are available within the Reference Model Orientation
dialog box:
 Projected area – Determines the area projected onto the Parting Plane as
defined by the current orientation of the reference model in the mold model. The
Projected Area is calculated based on the current orientation after Update is
clicked.
 Undo/Redo – Enables you to undo or redo the last action performed.
 Draft check – Enables a draft angle to be specified and performs a draft check on
the reference model's current orientation by clicking Shade. This shades the
model like a conventional draft check with the three colors blue, magenta, and
yellow.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Draft Check
 Bounding box information – Provides positive and negative distances from the
model origin to the edges of the bounding box. This information updates as the
part is moved and cannot be edited.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 4 – Bounding Box Information

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Reference-Model_Orientation folder and
click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click REF-ORIENT.ASM.

Task 1. Orient the reference model using dynamic orientation.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. The model is not in the proper orientation with respect to the PULL DIRECTION.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1

3. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
4. Click Redefine from the menu manager.

5. Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box.

6. Click Dynamic from the menu manager.

7. Notice the Parting Plane and the positive Z-direction.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
8. In the Reference Model Orientation dialog box, verify that Rotate is specified for
the X Axis.
 Drag the slider to the right until about 90, then edit the Value to 90 and press
ENTER.
 Notice the Parting Plane and the positive Z-direction.
 Click OK.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
9. Click Preview.
10. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

11. Enable Plane Tag Display .

12. Select the Mold tab.
13. Notice that the orientation is now correct for the PULL DIRECTION, but that the
MAIN_PARTING_PLN is on the top of the model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

14. Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box.

15. Click Dynamic from the menu manager.

16. In the Reference Model Orientation dialog box, select Translate and select the Z
Axis.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Drag the slider all the way to the left so the Value is -7.00 and notice the Parting
Plane.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
17. Click Preview from the Layout dialog box.
18. Notice that the MAIN_PARTING_PLN is now on the bottom.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
19. Click OK from the Layout dialog box and Done/Return from the menu manager.

Task 2. Orient the reference model using standard orientation.

20. In the model tree, expand REF-MODEL.PRT.

21. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .

22. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed objects check box
and click OK.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

23. Right-click STD_CSYS and select Resume.

24. Click Locate Reference Model and click Redefine from the menu
manager.

25. Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box.

26. Verify that the coordinate system type is Standard in the menu manager.
27. Select coordinate system STD_CSYS.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
28. Click OK from the Layout dialog box.
29. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
30. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

31. Disable Plane Tag Display .

32. Select the Mold tab.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 8

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout

You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities. When you create a
multiple-cavity layout in the mold model, the system creates a pattern of the
reference model to create the multiple cavities.
The following layout options are available:
 Single – Places a single cavity, or single instance, of the reference model in the
mold model. A Single cavity layout is shown in Figure 1.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Single Cavity Mold Model Layout

 Rectangular – Places the reference model in a rectangular layout in the mold
model. A Rectangular cavity layout is shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2 – Rectangular Cavity Mold Model Layout

The following options are available for the Rectangular layout:
o Cavities – Specifies the number of cavities, or number of pattern instances of the
reference model, in the X and Y directions. You can either edit the number or use
the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number of cavities in each
direction.
o Increment – Specifies the distance between origins of reference models in the X
and Y directions.

The X and Y directions are determined by the mold model coordinate system's X
and Y axes.
 Circular – Places the reference model in a circular layout in the mold model. A
Circular cavity layout is shown in Figure 3.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Circular Cavity Mold Model Layout

The following options are available for the Circular layout:
o Cavities – Specifies the number of cavities, or number of pattern instances of the
reference model, in the mold model.
o Radius – Specifies the radius value around which the cavities are placed.
o Start Angle – Specifies the angular distance in degrees about the mold model's
Z-axis that the first reference model's origin is placed. You can specify a negative
value.
o Increment – Specifies the angular distance between cavities in degrees.
 Variable – Enables you to place the reference model according to a user-defined
pattern table.

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Cavity-Layout folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CAVITY-LAYOUT.ASM.

Task 1. Analyze mold cavity layout in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Notice that the mold model is a single cavity mold.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

3. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

4. Click Redefine from the menu manager.

5. Notice that the current Layout specified is Single.
6. Select Rectangular as the Layout.
 Edit the X Cavity to 3.
 Edit the Y Cavity to 3.
 Edit the X Increment to 30.
 Edit the Y Increment to 30.
7. Click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
8. In the model tree, expand the Pattern feature.
9. Notice that there are 9 pattern members total.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
10. These pattern members correspond with the number of cavities in the mold
model.
11. In the Layout dialog box, edit the X and Y Increments to 50.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
12. In the Layout dialog box, edit the number of Y Cavities to 2.
 Click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
13. In the Layout dialog box, select Circular as the Layout.
 Edit the number of Cavities to 4.
 Edit the Radius to 40 and click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
14. Edit the Start Angle to 30 and click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
15. Notice that all four mold cavities rotated 30 degrees about the Z-axis.
16. Edit the Start Angle back to 0.
17. Edit the Increment to 60 and click OK from the Layout dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
18. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout

You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout option. When you
select the Variable option, the existing cavity layout is converted to the Variable
format, and the Variable table appears in the Layout dialog box. Each pattern
instance (reference model) displays in the left-most column, and the variables
that vary orientation are displayed in the right columns, as shown in the figures.
At this point, you can adjust the orientation for each pattern member
independently of the others.
The following orientation options are available for each pattern instance in the
Variable table:

 Reference Rotation — Rotates the reference model (pattern instance)

about its origin.

 X-Translation — Translates the reference model along its positive or

negative X-axis.

 Y-Translation — Translates the reference model along its positive or

negative Y-axis.

 Layout Rotation — Rotates reference model about mold layout origin.

Of these four options, the Y-Translation and Layout Rotation options are not
always available, depending upon which layout was converted to Variable. The
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Layout Rotation option is only available for a layout converted from Circular, as
shown in Figure 1.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Variable Cavity Converted from Circular Layout
The Y-Translation option is only available for a layout converted from Single or
Rectangular, as shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2 – Variable Cavity Converted from Single Layout

Additional Variable cavity layout options include the following:
 Highlight — When this check box is selected, any pattern instance selected in the
Variable table highlights in the graphics window.
 Add — Enables you to add a new pattern instance to the layout. The new pattern
instance member is inserted immediately following the pattern instance that is
selected when the Add button is clicked.
 Remove — Enables you to remove an existing pattern instance from the layout.
To remove a pattern instance, select it in the Variable table and click Remove.

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Cavity-Layout_Variable folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click VARIABLE-LAYOUT.ASM.

Task 1. Create a variable cavity layout.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group and click Redefine from
the menu manager.
3. Notice that the Layout is a Single cavity.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
4. In the Layout dialog box, select Variable as the Layout.
 Notice the new Variable table.
 Select the Highlight check box.
 Select VARIABLE-LAYOUT_REF and notice that it highlights in the graphics
window.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

5. In the Variable table, edit the Reference Rotation to 90.

 Edit the X-Translation to -40.

 Edit the Y-Translation to -40 and click Preview.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
6. In the Layout dialog box, click Add.

 Edit the Reference Rotation to -90.

 Edit the X-Translation to -40.

 Edit the Y-Translation to 40 and click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
7. In the Variable table, select the second pattern instance and click Add.

 Edit the Reference Rotation to -90.

 Edit the X-Translation to 50.

 Edit the Y-Translation to -40 and click Preview.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
8. In the Variable table, select the third pattern instance and click Add.

 Edit the Reference Rotation to 90.

 Edit the X-Translation to -50.

 Edit the Y-Translation to -40 and click Preview.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6

Task 2. Modify the variable cavity layout to a different layout.

9. In the Layout dialog box, select Circular as the Layout, edit the Radius to 60, and
click Preview.
10. Select Variable as the Layout.
11. In the Variable table, select the first pattern instance and edit the Reference

Rotation to -90, the X-Translation to 60, and the Layout Rotation

to 0.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

12. Edit the remaining pattern instance orientation values, as shown in the table.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
13. Click OK from the Layout dialog box.
14. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation

You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity layout. Examples of
reasons why cavity adjustment may be necessary include the following:
 More optimum layout for sprue and runner placement is required.
 More uniform cooling of parts is needed.
 Manufacturing feasibility of the mold design layout.
Consider each of the mold cavity layouts and their respective options for
orientation.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Single Cavity

Because there is only a single cavity, no further orientation adjustments are

available. The Orientation options become grayed out in the Layout dialog box.
Rather, you can adjust the cavity orientation in the layout by switching coordinate
systems or dynamically adjusting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Rectangular Cavity

The following Orientation options are available for the Rectangular cavity layout:
 Constant – Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction.
 X-Symmetric – Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's X-axis. That is, the
cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when looking
out from a plane that runs along the mold model's X-axis. X-Symmetric
orientation is shown in the left image of Figure 1.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Rectangular Layout, X-Symmetric versus Y-Symmetric Orientation
 Y-Symmetric – Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's Y-axis. That is, the
cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when looking
out from a plane that runs along the mold model's Y-axis. Y-Symmetric orientation
is shown in the right image of Figure 1.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Circular Cavity

The following Orientation options are available for the Circular cavity layout:
 Constant – Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction, as shown in
the left image of Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Circular Layout, Constant versus Radial Orientation
 Radial – Cavities are fanned about the mold model's origin. That is, the cavities
are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when looking out
radially from the mold model origin. Radial orientation is shown in the right image
of Figure 2.

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Cavity-Layout_Orientation folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click LAYOUT-ORIENT.ASM.

Task 1. Analyze mold cavity layout orientation in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
3. Click Redefine from the menu manager.
4. In the Layout dialog box, notice that the Layout is specified as Rectangular.
 Notice that the Orientation is specified as Constant.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to X-Symmetric.
 Click Preview.
 Notice that the cavity layout is symmetric about the mold model's X-axis.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
6. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to Y-Symmetric.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
7. Notice that the cavity layout is symmetric about the mold model's Y-axis.
8. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Layout to Circular.
 Edit the Orientation to Constant if necessary.
 Edit the Radius to 30.
 Click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
9. Notice that the cavities all face the same constant direction.
10. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to Radial.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
11. Notice that the cavity layout is radial about the mold model's origin.
12. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Layout to Single.
 Notice that all Orientation options are grayed out.
 Click OK.
13. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Calculating Projected Area

You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to help calculate the
clamping force needed to keep a mold set closed during operation. To calculate

the projected area, you can click Projected Area from the Analysis group.
This opens the Measure dialog box.
In the Measure dialog box, you must specify the following items:
 Entity – Specifies the entity that is to be projected. You can select the following
entity types:
o All Ref Parts – This is the default Entity selection.
o Surface
o Quilt
o Facets
 Projection Direction – Specifies the direction that the Entity is projected. You can
specify any of the following projection direction references:
o Default Pull Direction – This is the default Projection Direction.
o None
o Plane – Enables you to select a plane that the direction is perpendicular to.
o Line/Axis – Enables you to select a line or axis as the direction.
o Coordinate System – Enables you to select a coordinate system. Once you select
the coordinate system, you must specify which coordinate axis defines the
direction.
o View Plane – Uses the current viewing plane as the projection reference.
Once you have defined the entity and projection direction, you can click Compute
to calculate the projected area of the entity.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Calculating Projected Area

The selected entity is projected onto an imaginary plane that is perpendicular to
the projection reference, as shown in Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Illustration of Projected Area
The area of this projection is calculated.

Calculating Projected Area

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Projected-Area folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PROJ-AREA.ASM.

Task 1. Calculate the projected area of a reference model in a mold

model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Projected Area from the Analysis group.

3. In the Measure dialog box, notice that the default Entity is All Ref Parts.
 Notice that the default Projection Direction is Default Pull Direction.
 Notice the projected area of the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

4. Enable Plane Display .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

5. In the Measure dialog box, edit the Projection Direction to Plane.

 Prehighlight datum plane MOLD_FRONT and then select it.
 Click Compute.
 Notice the updated projected area.
 Click Close.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

This completes the procedure.

Creating the Shower Head Mold Model

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shower-Head_Create folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHOWER_HEAD.PRT.

Objectives
 Create a new mold model.
 Assemble the reference model.
 Modify the mold cavity layout.

Scenario
In this exercise, you create a new shower head mold model by assembling a
multi-cavity reference model. You have already analyzed the design model and
verified that the model is sufficient for molding.

Task 1. Inspect the shower head model that is to be molded.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Spin the design model and inspect it.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

3. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 2. Create a new shower head mold model.

4. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.

 Select Manufacturing as the Type.
 Select Mold cavity as the Sub-type.
 Type shower_head_mold as the Name.
 Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
5. In the New File Options dialog box, select mmns_mfg_mold as the Template.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

Task 3. Create and assemble the reference model.

6. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
 Click Add.
 Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
 Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.

7. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-
down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group to assemble the
reference model.
8. In the Open dialog box, double-click SHOWER_HEAD.PRT to open it.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

9. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Inherited as the Reference
model type and click OK.

10. In the Layout dialog box, click Reference Model Origin and click Dynamic
from the menu manager.
11. In the Reference Model Orientation dialog box, select Rotate as the Coordinate
System Move option, and select Y as the Axis.
 Type -180 as the Value and click OK.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
12. In the Layout dialog box, select Rectangular as the Layout.
 Edit the Number of Cavities in the X and Y directions to 2, if necessary.
 Edit the X Increment to 120.
 Edit the Y Increment to 250.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
13. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to X-Symmetric.
 Edit the Y Increment to 150.
 Click OK.
14. Click OK from the Warning dialog box to accept the accuracy change.
15. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

16. Disable Plane Display .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

17. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save the model.

18. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Understanding Shrinkage
When a molded part is removed from a mold, it tends to shrink in size as it cools
down to room temperature. The amount of shrinkage that occurs in a molding is
highly dependent on part geometry, mold configuration, and processing
conditions. Because the mold components are designed from the reference
model, you must consider the shrinkage of the material in the reference model
before you proceed with the rest of the mold design process. This typically means
that you proportionally increase dimensions of the reference model so that the
mold components created are of the pre-shrunk molding size.
You can apply shrinkage to the reference model in Mold mode. Depending on the
method of applying shrinkage and the method used to assemble the reference
model, the shrinkage feature may propagate to the design model.
Creo Parametric uses the following formulae to calculate shrinkage:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 1+S — Uses a precalculated shrinkage factor that is based on the original

geometry of the reference model.
 1/(1–S) — Enables you to specify a shrinkage factor that is based upon the final
geometry of the reference model once shrinkage is applied.
In the above formulae, S is the shrinkage ratio specified.
There are two different methods to apply shrinkage:
 Shrinkage by Dimension
 Shrinkage by Scale

Enlarge
Image
Figure 1 – Shrinkage Dialog Boxes

Viewing Shrinkage Information

When shrinkage has been applied to a reference model, you can view the
information regarding the shrinkage by clicking the Analysis group drop-down
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

menu and selecting Shrinkage Information . An information window

appears, providing you with the following details:
 Model name — Specifies the name of the model that shrinkage was applied to.
 Shrinkage method — Specifies whether the model is shrunk by scaling or by
dimension.
 Shrinkage formula — Specifies which formula was used to apply the shrinkage to
the model.
 Model Dimensions and Shrinkage Value — When shrinkage has been applied by
dimensions, these specify which dimensions the shrinkage was applied to and
the shrinkage value applied to each dimension.
 Shrink coordinate system — Specifies the coordinate system specified when
shrinkage is applied by scaling.
 Shrink factors — Specifies the shrink scaling factors used when shrinkage is
applied by scaling.

Applying Shrinkage by Scale

The Shrinkage by Scale method enables you to shrink the part geometry by
scaling it in relation to a coordinate system. You can specify different shrinkage
ratios for the X, Y, and Z-coordinates. If you apply shrinkage in Mold mode, it
applies only to the reference model and does not affect the design model.
Shrinkage by scale is applied by creating a new shrinkage feature. When you
apply shrinkage in Mold mode, the shrinkage feature is created in the reference
model, not in the design model, unless the Same Model option was used when
assembling the reference model into the mold model.
To apply shrinkage by scale, you must specify the following items:
 Coordinate System – Specify the model coordinate system that the shrinkage
feature uses as a reference. The X, Y, and Z-directions of the coordinate system
determine the X, Y, and Z-directions used for the shrinkage ratio.
 Formula – Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage.
 Shrink Ratio – Specifies the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply.
The following options are available when applying shrinkage by scale:
 Isotropic – When enabled, sets the same shrinkage ratio for the X, Y, and Z-
directions.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Model Before Shrinkage Applied

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Isotropic Shrinkage by Scale Applied

You can clear this check box to specify a different shrinkage ratio for each of the
three directions.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Different Shrinkage Ratios Applied to Different Directions
 Forward references – When enabled, the shrinkage does not create new
geometry but changes the existing geometry so that all existing references
continue to be part of the model. You can clear this check box to have the system
create new geometry for the part on which shrinkage is being applied.

Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Scale

When applying shrinkage by scale in Mold mode, keep the following in mind:
 A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage ratio
expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with the 1+S
formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a negative 0.02
shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent.
 It is never reflected in the design model, unless the design model is the reference
model.
 If it is applied to the design model in Part mode, then the shrinkage feature
belongs to the design model, not to the reference model. Shrinkage is accurately
reflected by the reference model geometry, but it cannot be cleared in Mold
mode.
 It should be applied prior to the definition of parting surfaces or volumes.
 It affects part geometry (surfaces and edges) and datum features (including
curves, axes, planes, and points).
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension

The Shrinkage by Dimension method enables you to set up one shrinkage ratio
for all model dimensions, and specify ratios for individual dimensions.
To apply shrinkage by dimension, you must specify the following items:
 Formula – Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage.
 Dimensions – Specify which dimensions to add shrinkage to.
 Shrinkage Ratio – Specifies the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply.
Within the Shrinkage By Dimension dialog box, a table displays the following
columns:
 Dimensions – Displays which dimensions have a shrinkage ratio applied. The
dimension symbol and original value are displayed in the cell.
 Ratio – Displays the shrinkage ratio for each dimension in the table.
 Final value – Displays the final dimension value once the shrinkage ratio has
been applied.
You can specify a shrinkage ratio for All Dimensions in the model. The shrinkage
ratio is in the first row of the Shrinkage Ratio table. In Figure 2, a shrinkage ratio
of 0.5 has been applied to all dimensions.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Model Before Shrinkage Applied

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Shrinkage Ratio Applied to All Dimensions

To add additional dimensions to the table, you can use the following methods:

 Insert Selected Dimensions – Displays the dimensions for a selected

feature, enabling you to select and apply the desired shrinkage ratio. In Figure 3,
the 3 hole diameter dimension has had a shrinkage ratio applied to it.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Different Shrinkage Ratios Applied to Specific Dimensions

 Insert All Dimensions From Feature – Enables you to select a feature in the
graphics window. All dimensions comprising that feature are automatically added
to the table. In Figure 3, all three dimensions of the main extrude feature have
had a shrinkage ratio applied.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 You can also click Add New Row and type the symbol for the dimension. You

can see what a given dimension's symbol is by clicking Toggle Dimensions .

The following options are available when applying shrinkage by dimension:

 Change Dimensions of Design Part – Determines whether the shrinkage feature
is placed in the design model. Depending on the method of reference model
creation, this option may be grayed out. For example, if the reference model was
created using the Same Model, this option does nothing, as the feature is created
in the design model regardless.

Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Dimension

When applying shrinkage by dimension, keep the following in mind:

 A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage ratio
expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with the 1+S
formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a negative 0.02
shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent.
 If the part has had shrinkage applied, dimensions display in magenta when
viewed in the design model or a drawing, as shown in Figures 2 and 3.
 If the part has not had shrinkage applied, dimensions remain displayed in black
when viewed in the design model or a drawing.
 Shrinkage by dimension values is not cumulative. For example, if you specify 1.5
as the All Dimensions shrinkage ratio for a model with 10 as the value of all its
dimensions, and then specify a separate shrinkage ratio of 2.0 for the length
dimension, then the final length is 20 (10*2.0), not 30 [(10*1.5)*2.0]. Individual
shrinkage values for dimensions always supersede the overall model shrink
value.
 The configuration file option, shrinkage_value_display, determines how
dimensions are displayed when shrinkage is applied to a model. The possible
values of this configuration option are percent_shrink and final_value. For the
procedure, the value for this configuration option is percent_shrink.
 By default, whenever a part has shrinkage information associated with it, the
nominal dimension values are displayed, followed by the shrinkage value in
parentheses. If you set the value of the configuration file option
shrinkage_value_display to percent_shrink, shrinkage is represented as
percentage of the nominal dimension. You can display the final value of the
shrunken dimensions by changing the value of the configuration file option
shrinkage_value_display to final_value.

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shrinkage_Dimension folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHRINKAGE_DIM.ASM.

Task 1. Apply shrinkage by dimension to a reference model.

 The shrinkage ratios specified in this procedure are not representative of real-world shrinkage ratios.
Higher ratios are used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes, due to applying
shrinkage.

2. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. In the model tree, expand reference model SHRINKAGE_DIM.PRT.

4. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit .

5. Notice the three feature dimensions.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

6. Select Shrink by dimension from the Shrinkage types drop-down menu in

the Modifiers group.

7. In the Shrinkage By Dimension dialog box, verify that the Formula is 1+S .

 Edit the ratio to 0.5 for All Dimensions, and click OK .

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
8. Notice that the model gets uniformly larger.
9. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

10. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit .

11. Notice that the dimensions are magenta and display the percent increase they
have undergone.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

12. Right-click Round 1 and select Edit .

13. Click Shrink by dimension .

 Edit the ratio to -0.5 for All Dimensions, and click OK .

14. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

15. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit .

 Right-click Round 1 and select Edit .

16. Notice that the dimensions are magenta and display the percent decrease they
have undergone.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

17. Click Shrink by dimension .

 Edit the ratio to 0.0 for All Dimensions.

 Click Insert Selected Dimensions and select Hole 1.

 Select the 3 dimension.

 Click Insert All Dimensions From Feature .

 Select Extrude 1.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
18. In the Shrinkage Ratio table, edit the ratio for dimension d6 to 0.5.
 Edit the d1 ratio to 0.75.
 Edit the d2 ratio to 0.15.
 Edit the d0 ratio to 0.75.

 Notice the final values for each of the dimensions in the table and click OK .

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 6
19. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

20. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit .

 Right-click Hole 1 and select Edit .

21. Notice the different individual percentage shrinkage increases.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Creating Display Styles

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Original Model
The display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the four
following display options: Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded. You
can also assign display styles to individual components in an assembly that can
be used regardless of those overall session settings.
Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for your assembly.
You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an assembly:
 Wireframe – Shows front and back lines equally.
 Hidden Line – Shows hidden lines in ghost tones.
 No Hidden – Does not show lines behind forward surfaces.
 Shaded – Shows the model as a shaded solid.
 Transparent – Shows the model as a transparent solid.
 Blank – Does not show the model.
You can apply existing display styles to sub-assemblies using the By Display tab.
When you select a sub-assembly from the model tree, the available display styles
for that sub-assembly display in the By Display tab, enabling you to specify the
desired one.
You can also modify component display styles without using the view manager.
You can select desired models in the graphics window, model tree, or search tool
and click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component
Display Style to assign a display style to the selected models. You can store
these temporary edits with a new display style or update them to an existing one.
After you define the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing a Display Style

Uses of Display Styles

You use display styles to do the following:

 Increase system performance by either blanking components from display or
limiting the number of components being calculated for hidden line display.
 Create and save display settings used in presentations or other common
situations where it is helpful to change the display of components within an
assembly.
You cannot use display styles in drawing view.

Blanked components are not removed from session memory; they are only removed from display. For
this reason, you cannot use display styles to reduce the amount of memory required to open and work
with an assembly. You reduce the required memory using simplified reps.

Creating Display Styles

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\View\Display-Style_View-Manager folder and
click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click GEARBOX_S2.ASM.

Task 1. Create a new display style using the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.

3. Select the Style tab from the view manager.
4. Click New.
5. Press ENTER to accept the default name Style0001.
 Notice this opens the EDIT dialog box on the Blank tab.

Enlarge
Image
Figure 1
6. In the model tree, select GEARBOX_REAR_S2.PRT.
7. Click Preview.
8. In the model tree, select the four BOLT_5-18.PRT models.
 Notice that the Blank component status is shown in the Edit column of the model
tree.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge
Image
Figure 2
9. Click Preview.
10. In the EDIT dialog box, select the Show tab and select Transparent.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
11. In the model tree, expand the DRILL_CHUCK_S2.ASM node and then select
CHUCK_S2.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT.
12. Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

13. Click OK.

Task 2. Copy and redefine to create a new display style.

14. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
15. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002.
16. Double-click Style0002 to activate it.
17. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager.
18. In the model tree, select CHUCK_S2.PRT and PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT to also be
blanked.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
19. Click Preview.

20. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Display Style
types drop-down menu.
21. Click OK.

Task 3. Use the model tree to edit a display style.

22. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
23. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

24. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.

25. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.

26. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .

27. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select Display Styles from the Type drop-
down list.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
28. In the Display Style list, select STYLE0003 and click Add Column to add the
column to the model tree.
29. Click OK.
30. In the STYLE0003 column of the model tree, click to the right of
GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT and select Blank from the drop-down list.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
31. To the right of PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT, select Undo from the drop-down list.

32. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .

33. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column and OK.
 Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you with the option to preview or reset any
edits that you make.

This completes the procedure.

Creating a Workpiece Automatically

Once you assemble the reference model into the mold model, you typically create
and assemble the workpiece next. The workpiece is a model that represents the
full volume of all the mold components (cavity, core, and inserts) that are needed
to create the final mold model. The workpiece icon that displays in the model tree
is different than that of a conventional part model and the reference model, which
is shown in Figure 1.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Viewing the Workpiece in the Model Tree
The workpiece displays transparent green in the graphics window.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

To automatically create a workpiece, select Automatic Workpiece from the

Workpiece types drop-down menu. The workpiece is automatically assembled to

the specified Origin coordinate system using the Coincident assembly

constraint, and the accuracy is automatically set to match that of the reference
model.
To create an automatic workpiece, you must specify the following items:
 Mold Origin – The Mold Origin is a mold model coordinate system from which
directions are determined for workpiece creation.
 Shape – The shape determines the shape of the workpiece. The system creates
a workpiece with the minimum dimensions that the reference model fits in, within
the specified shape. The following options are available:
o Standard Rectangular – This creates a rectangular workpiece using Create

Rectangular Workpiece , which is shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Standard Rectangular Workpiece

o Standard Round – This creates a round-shaped workpiece using Create Round

Workpiece , which is shown in Figure 3.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Standard Round Workpiece
o Custom – Custom creates a custom-shaped workpiece using Create Custom

Workpiece .

 Units – This specifies the system of units for the workpiece. You can select
inches or millimeters.
 Offsets – This enables you to specify the offset values to add to the dimensions
of the workpiece, based on the mold origin. The offsets depend on the shape of
the workpiece that you have selected. You can specify each offset individually, or
specify all offsets uniformly. The following offset options are available:
o X-direction – This adds material in the positive or negative X-direction. This offset
is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and some custom shapes.
o Y-direction – This adds material in the positive or negative Y-direction. This offset
is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and some custom shapes.
o Z-direction – This adds material in the positive or negative Z-direction.
o Radial – Radial adds material in the positive radial direction.
o Uniform Offsets – This adds material in the positive and negative X-, Y-, and Z-
directions, and Radial, where applicable.
 Overall Dimensions – The overall dimensions get updated when you specify
offset values. However, you can also specify the overall dimensions, and the
offset values get updated automatically. You can manually specify the X and Y
dimensions for rectangular and custom workpieces, and the Diameter for
rounded workpieces, to customize the workpiece size. You can manually specify
the Z Cavity and Z Core dimensions for all workpieces to customize the size.
 Translate Workpiece – This enables you to specify the translation values for the
X- and Y-directions to position the workpiece around the reference model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

You can modify the default Workpiece Name. The Workpiece Name is the name
of the workpiece component as it displays in the model tree. By default, its name
is of the format <MOLD-MODEL-NAME>_WRK, which is shown in Figure 1.

Creating a Workpiece Automatically

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Workpiece_Auto folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click AUTO-WRKPIECE_RECT.ASM.

Task 1. Create a rectangular workpiece in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in

the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
3. Select coordinate system MOLD_DEF_CSYS from the model tree.
4. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, notice the name of the workpiece.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

5. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, click Create Rectangular Workpiece

if necessary.
 Verify that the Units are in mm.
 Notice that there are no Offsets specified.
 Notice the Overall X, Y, and Z dimensions.
 Click Preview.
6. Notice that the workpiece just barely covers the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
7. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, edit the Uniform Offsets value to 30.
 Notice that the X, Y, and Z direction +/- offsets all become 30.
 Notice that the Overall dimensions' values have also updated automatically.
 Click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
8. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, type 40 for the - and + offsets in the Y
direction.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
9. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, edit the Overall X Dimension to 340.
 Edit the Overall Y Dimension to 160.
 Notice that the Offset values have updated.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

Task 2. Create a round workpiece in a mold model.

10. Click Open and double-click AUTO-WRKPIECE_ROUND.ASM.

11. Select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu
and select MOLD_DEF_CSYS.

12. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, click Create Round Workpiece .

 Edit the Radial Offset to 5.

 Edit the +Z Cavity to 6.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Edit the -Z Core to 6.

 Click Preview.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
13. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, drag the Translate Workpiece X direction
slider to the right.
 Drag the Translate Workpiece Y direction slider to the left and click Preview.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

14. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, edit the X and Y Translate Workpiece
Directions to 0 and click OK.

This completes the procedure.

Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece

In addition to a Standard Rectangular and Standard Round automatic workpiece,
you can also create a custom workpiece. A custom automatic workpiece enables
you to add flanges to the top and bottom of the workpiece. It also enables you to
add rounds or chamfers to the vertical workpiece edges.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – bar_top_flange Custom Workpiece

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – chamf_CHAMF_xy_bot_flange Custom Workpiece

The process is the same as creating a rectangular or round workpiece.
To create a custom automatic workpiece, you can use the Create Custom

Workpiece option in the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, and then select the
desired shape in the drop-down list below it. The default shape for a custom
workpiece is BLOCK_XY_FLANGES, as shown in Figure 1.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – block_xy_flanges Custom Workpiece

However, the following shapes are also available:
 BLOCK_00_FLANGES
 BLOCK_00_BOT_FLANGE
 BLOCK_CHAMF_00_FLANGES
 CHAMF_CHAMF_00_BOT_FLANGE
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 BLOCK_ROUND
 BLOCK_ROUND_00_TOP_FLANGE
 BAR_FLANGES
 BAR_BOT_FLANGE
 BLOCK_00_TOP_FLANGE
 BLOCK_CHAMF
 BLOCK_CHAMF_00_TOP_FLANGE
 BLOCK_CHAMF_00_BOT_FLANGE
 BLOCK_ROUND_00_FLANGES
 BLOCK_ROUND_00_BOT_FLANGE
 BAR_TOP_FLANGE
The 00 value in the shapes above represent the X, Y, or XY direction.

You can use the offsets available for the rectangular and round automatic
workpiece for a custom workpiece.

Creating and Assembling a Workpiece

Manually

Creating a Workpiece Manually

You can create a workpiece manually using either of the following methods:
 Create the workpiece within the mold model by selecting Create Workpiece

from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Model &
Workpiece group. The Component Create dialog box appears, and you must
provide the name of the workpiece component as it displays in the model tree.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Creating a Workpiece within the Mold Model

 Create the workpiece outside the mold model as a conventional part model.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Part Model
When the part model is needed as the workpiece in the mold model, you can
assemble it as a component into the mold model and designate it as the workpiece.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Part Model Assembled as Workpiece

When creating the workpiece manually, you can use any of the conventional part
modeling feature techniques available when creating a regular part model. For
example, you can use Extrude features, Revolve features, Hole features, Sweep
features, and Blend features.

Assembling a Manually Created Workpiece

If the workpiece is created in the mold model, it is already designated as the

workpiece upon its creation. It must then be properly assembled into the mold
model.
If you create a part model outside of the mold and want to use it as the workpiece
in a mold model, you must assemble it into the mold model and designate it as

the workpiece. You can do this by selecting Assemble Workpiece from the
Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
You can assemble the workpiece into the mold model using any of the available

assembly constraints including Default , Coincident , Distance ,

Angle Offset , Parallel , and Normal .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Considerations When Creating and Assembling a

Workpiece Manually

Keep the following in mind when creating and assembling a workpiece manually:
 If you manually create a workpiece and assemble it into the mold model, you
need to match the workpiece accuracy to that of the reference model.
 Keep the location of where the workpiece is split in mind. You can create a datum
plane or coordinate system at this location to aid in the assembly process later.

Best Practices

It is a best practice to create an automatic workpiece whenever possible. When

an automatic workpiece is created, Creo Parametric automatically sets the
accuracy of the workpiece model to that of the reference model. If a manual
workpiece is created and assembled into the mold model, you must manually
modify the workpiece accuracy so that it matches the reference model.

Creating and Assembling a Workpiece

Manually
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Workpiece_Manual folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MANUAL_WRK.PRT.

Task 1. Assemble a workpiece created outside the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Notice the part model and its datum planes.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
 The accuracy has already been set to that of the reference model.

3. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

4. Click Open and double-click CAP.ASM.

5. Select Assemble Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in

the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
6. In the Open dialog box, double-click MANUAL_WRK.PRT.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
7. In the dashboard, select Default from the constraint drop-down list.

 Click Complete Component .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
8. Notice the component is now in the workpiece color.
9. Notice the workpiece symbol in the model tree.

10. Click Close .

Task 2. Create and assemble a workpiece in the mold model.

11. Click Open and double-click CAP_ROUND.ASM.

12. Select Create Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece group.
13. In the Create Component dialog box, type ROUND_WRK as the Name and click
OK.
14. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing if necessary and
click Browse.
 Select Working Directory and double-click MMNS_PART_SOLID.PRT.
 Click OK.
15. In the dashboard, select Default from the constraint drop-down list and click

Complete Component .
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

16. In the model tree, right-click ROUND_WRK.PRT and select Activate .

17. Pre-highlight datum plane TOP and then select it.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

18. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

19. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

20. Click Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the
Sketching group and sketch a circle, using the origin as the circle center.
21. Middle-click and edit the diameter to 80.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

22. Click OK .
23. Edit the depth to 45.
24. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
 Select Blind as the Side 2 depth and edit the depth to 15.

 Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
25. Press CTRL+A to activate the top level assembly.

This completes the procedure.

Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model

Components

Reclassifying Mold Model Components

You can switch the classification of components within the mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Mold Model Before Reclassification
Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which component is used
as the workpiece. Each of the following component types can be reclassified to any
of the other types:
 Workpiece — The mold model uses the selected component as a workpiece. In
Figure 2, the rectangular mold base component has been reclassified as a
workpiece.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Mold Base Component Reclassified to a Workpiece

 Mold Base Component — The mold model uses the selected component as a
mold base component. In Figure 3, the round workpiece has been reclassified as
a mold base component.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 3 – Mold Model After Reclassification

 Mold Component — The mold model uses the selected component as a mold
component.
The following are some points to keep in mind when reclassifying mold model
components:
 You cannot reclassify the reference model.
 You cannot reclassify a different model to become a reference model.
 The mold model can contain multiple workpieces. In Figure 2, a mold base
component has been reclassified as a workpiece, causing there to be two
workpieces in the mold model.

Removing Mold Model Components

You can remove components from the mold model in any of the following ways:

 Select the component, right-click, and select Delete .

 Select the component, and press DELETE.

 Select the component and select Delete from the Delete types drop-down
menu in the Operation group.
The Undo and Redo operations are not available if you remove components from the mold
model.

Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model

Components
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Reclassify folder and click OK
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click File > Open and double-click RECLASSIFY.ASM.

Task 1. Reclassify mold model components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the model tree, click ROUND_WRK.PRT and notice the round workpiece in the
mold model.
3. Notice also the rectangular mold base component.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

4. Click Classify from the Modifiers group.

5. Select MANUAL_WRK.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box.
6. Click Workpiece > Done from the menu manager.
7. Notice that there are now two workpieces in the mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
8. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT and middle-click to accept the selection.
9. Click Mld Base Cmp > Done from the menu manager.
10. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
11. Notice that there is now only one workpiece in the mold model.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

Task 2. Remove a mold model component.

12. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT, right-click, and select Delete .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

13. Click OK from the Delete dialog box.

14. Notice the mold base component is removed from the mold model.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

This completes the procedure.

Mold Volume Creation

Module Overview:
Once the reference model and workpiece have been assembled into the mold
model you must create mold volumes within the mold model. Mold volumes are
surfaces that locate a closed volume of space in the workpiece, and are
ultimately used to create the final mold core, cavity, and slider components.
In this module, you learn which mold volumes are in a mold model and how to
create them.

Objectives:
After completing this module, you will be able to:
 Understand and explain some of the basic surfacing terms.
 Understand what mold volumes are and explain their characteristics.
 Sketch mold volumes.
 Create sliders using boundary quilts.
 Sketch sliders.
 Create a reference part cutout.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Sketch lifter and insert mold volumes.

 Replace surfaces and trim to geometry.

Surfacing Terms
Surface modeling terms are used throughout this course. Therefore, they are
important to understand.
 Surface – Surfaces are infinitely thin, non-solid features used to aid in the design
of highly complex and irregular shapes. Notice that surfaces are shown using
orange and purple highlighting on the edges when viewed in wireframe display,
as in Figure 1.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing a Surface

o Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges.
o Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges, since they border two surface patches.
In Creo Parametric, the term surface can be used for any of the following:
 Quilts – A quilt may consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces. A quilt
represents a patchwork of connected surfaces. A multi-surface quilt contains
information describing the geometry of all the surfaces that compose it, and
information on how these surfaces are joined or intersected, such as the models
shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2 – Surface Quilt

 Surface Patch – If you create a surface feature, which is made of several
segments, the surface is created with multiple patches, as in Figure 1.
 Solid Surfaces – A face of a solid feature, such as the solid model shown in
Figure 3.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Solid Surface and Edge
 Datum Planes – A planar datum feature that extends infinitely but is represented
by a rectangular border.
 Edge – An edge is the boundary of a solid, as in Figure 3 or a surface, as in
Figure 4.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4 – Surface Edge

Surface edges can be one-sided or two-sided depending on the presence of
adjacent surface geometry.

Understanding Mold Volumes

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume of space within
the workpiece. Because the mold volume is comprised of surfaces, it has no solid
material. Creating mold volumes is an intermediate step to creating the final
extracted mold components. Mold volumes are ultimately used to create the final
solid extracted mold components. Figure 2 shows three different mold volumes.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Mold Volumes Shaded

Because the mold volumes are surfaces, they appear magenta when the model
display is set to something other than shading, as shown in Figure 3.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Mold Volumes No Hidden
The following is some general information regarding mold volume creation:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 A mold volume can add or remove material.

 A mold volume is created as an assembly level protrusion or cut within the mold
model.
 You can sketch mold volumes.
 A mold volume can be trimmed or split using other surfaces.
 Mold volume creation is an iterative process. You can create mold volumes at any
time after the workpiece is assembled but before the final solid mold components
are extracted.
A mold volume displays in the model tree with a different icon than that of the
reference model and workpiece, as shown in Figure 1.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Model Tree of Mold Model

Because mold volumes are created within the workpiece, it is beneficial to create a style state that sets
the workpiece to wireframe when creating mold volumes. This enables you to more clearly see inside
the workpiece, yet it still makes the workpiece and its surfaces available if they need to be selected as
references. The workpiece in the figures is set to wireframe.

Renaming Mold Volumes

When you create a mold volume, it is a best practice to rename it to something

that helps you recognize it within the model tree. To rename a mold volume, you

can click Properties from the Controls group after starting the mold volume
creation tool. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select
Properties. This causes the Properties dialog box to appear, which enables you
to edit the mold volume name. In Figure 1, notice that the mold volumes have
been renamed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Applying Finishing Features

You can add draft and round features to a mold volume in the same manner in
which you add to any other solid part. This enables you to customize the mold
volume. It is used to create the solid mold component.

Sketching Mold Volumes

You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Sketching a Mold Volume

Consider the following guidelines when sketching mold volumes:
 The mold volume is a set of surfaces.
 You can use most sketch-based features within Mold mode to create a mold
volume. Feature tools you can use include:

o Extrude — Extrudes a sketch section to a specified depth in the direction

normal to the sketching plane.

o Revolve — Revolves a sketched section by a specific angle around an axis

of rotation.

o Sweep — Sweeps a sketched section along a specific trajectory. Create

constant section sweeps or variable section sweeps.
o Blend tool — Creates a straight or smooth blended volume by connecting several
sketched sections.

o Swept Blend — Sweeps a blend section along a specified trajectory.

o Use Quilt — Creates a volume by referencing a surface or quilt.
 Depending on the tool used and the desired mold volume, it can be beneficial to
use the workpiece surfaces as sketching planes for the mold volumes.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 The sketch must be closed.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Mold Model with No Mold Volumes

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Mold Model with Mold Volume

Sketching Mold Volumes

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Volume_Sketch folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SKETCH-VOLUME.ASM.

Task 1. Sketch a mold volume in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. From the model tree, select SKETCH-VOLUME_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1
5. Select the Mold tab.

6. Select Mold Volume from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

7. Click Properties from the Controls group.

8. In the Properties dialog box, edit the Name to PLUG_VOL and press ENTER.

9. Click Revolve from the Shapes group.

10. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
11. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT from the model tree as the Sketch Plane.
12. Select Top from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch.

13. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

15. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Display Style
types drop-down menu.

16. Click References from the Setup group.

17. Zoom in and select the top workpiece surface, datum axis A_1, the bottom of the
plug, and the angled edge.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
18. Click Close from the References dialog box.

19. Click Centerline from the Datum group.

20. Sketch a vertical centerline on the axis reference.

21. Click Line Chain from the Sketching group and sketch the five lines shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

22. Click OK .
23. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.

24. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

25. Click OK from the Controls group.

26. De-select all geometry.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

27. Select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu and

disable Axis Display .

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
28. Notice that the sketched mold volume is a surface.

29. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

This completes the procedure.

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts

What is a Slider?

A slider is a mold component that helps account for undercuts in the reference
model geometry. Undercuts are features in the reference model that would
prevent a conventional core-and-cavity mold from opening after the molded part
has solidified. Sliders “slide” in from the sides to account for these undercuts to
keep the mold from locking when opening and closing, or destroying the part. The
action of these sliders is called side action.

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts

In Creo Parametric, a slider is a special type of mold volume that can be used to
ultimately create the slider mold component. One of the ways you can create
sliders in Creo Parametric is by using boundary quilts. To create a slider mold

volume using boundary quilts, you must select Mold Volume from the Mold
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group and

then click Slider from the Volume Tools group. This launches the Slider
Volume dialog box.
The Slider Volume dialog box displays the reference part found in the mold
model. If the mold model contains more than one reference model, you must
specify which one is to be used for the calculation.
You can also specify the pull direction. The system utilizes the mold model's pull
direction as the default Pull Direction, but you can specify a different pull direction
by selecting any of the following references:
 Plane — Makes the pull direction perpendicular to the specified plane.
 Curve, Edge, or Axis — Makes the pull direction follow the selected curve, edge,
or axis.
 Coordinate System — Makes the pull direction follow the specified axis of the
selected coordinate system.
Once the pull direction has been defined, you can click Calculate Undercut
Boundaries from the Slider Volume dialog box. This causes the system to
perform a geometry check for undercut areas in the reference model. The system
performs the check by shining a light on the reference model in the pull direction.
The areas where light does not reach are the undercuts, which are also known as
black volumes. These areas would cause the mold to lock on opening or closing.
Therefore, a slider is required in these areas.
The system creates boundary quilts in the areas where the undercuts occur and
displays them in the Exclude column of the Slider Volume dialog box. You can
select each boundary quilt and perform the following operations on each quilt:
 Mesh — Meshes the boundary surface in the graphics window. In Figure 1, the
boundary surface is meshed.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1 – Meshing a Boundary Quilt

 Shade — Shades only the boundary surface in the graphics window, temporarily
hiding all other geometry.
You can then add each quilt that you want to become a slider mold volume to the
Include column of the Slider Volume dialog box. The system automatically
extrudes the slider mold volume based on the boundary quilt. A completed slider
mold volume is shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Slider Mold Volume

Specifying the Projection Plane

Optionally, you can specify a projection plane for each slider mold volume. The
system extends the extruded slider volume up to the specified projection plane, in
the direction normal to the plane. In Figure 3, the right surface of the workpiece
was specified as the projection plane.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Slider Mold Volume Projected to Workpiece Surface
The resulting slider mold volume is projected up to this surface.

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Slider_Boundary folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SLIDER-CALC.ASM.

Task 1. Create a slider mold volume using boundary quilts in a mold

model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. From the model tree, select SLIDER-CALC_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. Select the Mold tab.

6. Click Mold Volume from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

7. Click Properties from the Controls group.

8. In the Properties dialog box, edit the Name to CORNER_SLIDER and press
ENTER.

9. Click Slider from the Volume Tools group.

10. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Calculate Undercut Boundaries .
 Notice that one undercut area was found in the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
11. In the Slider Volume dialog box, select Quilt 1 and click Mesh Selected

Boundary Surfaces .
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
12. Notice that the quilt is meshed in the graphics window.

13. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Shade Selected Boundary Surfaces .

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
14. Click OK from the Shade Info dialog box.
15. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Include Boundary Surfaces to include
the quilt.

 Click Apply Changes .

16. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
17. Notice the slider mold volume that was created.
18. With the slider mold volume still selected, right-click and select Edit Definition

19. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Select Projection Plane .

20. Select the right surface of the workpiece.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

21. Click Apply Changes from the Slider Volume dialog box.

22. Notice that the slider mold volume has extruded out to the selected surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes

You can also sketch slider mold volumes. The following are reasons to sketch
slider mold volumes:
 Shape – When calculated undercut boundaries are used, the resulting slider mold
volume takes on the shape of the undercut geometry. If the shape is not desired
for manufacturing, or it cannot be manufactured, a slider mold volume can be
sketched to account for the undercut geometry. In Figure 1, the shape created by
calculating undercut boundaries is not as conducive to manufacturing as the
sketched slider mold volume in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1 – Undesired Slider Result

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Sketched Slider Mold Volumes

 Size – Since the slider mold volume created by calculating undercut boundaries
takes on the shape of the undercut, the slider mold volume may be too small for
manufacturing, as shown in Figure 3.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Slider Volume too Small

Consequently, you can sketch a larger slider mold volume that accounts for the
undercut, as shown in Figure 2.
 Result – Depending on the reference model geometry, sometimes the slider mold
volume obtained by calculating undercut boundaries cannot be created, or the
slider mold volume does not entirely account for undercut geometry. In Figure 1,
the slider does not properly account for the round feature, and thus a sketched
mold volume was created in Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Guidelines for Sketching Sliders

When creating slider mold volumes using sketch-based features, consider the
following guidelines:
 You can still initially calculate the undercut boundaries for the reference model
even when you are sketching the slider mold volumes. The analysis helps you
determine the locations in the mold model where sliders will be required and
helps ensure that you have accounted for all undercut geometry.
 Ensure that the sketch you create accounts for the entire undercut geometry.
That is, make sure that the entire undercut geometry is contained within the
resulting sketched slider mold volume. It can be beneficial to utilize the sides of
the undercut geometry as sketching references.
 Because the slider is simply a special type of mold volume, you can use any
sketch-based feature that is available for sketching the conventional mold volume
on the slider mold volume.
 Because the slider is a mold volume, the sketch must be closed.

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Slider_Sketch folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SLIDER-SKETCH.ASM.

Task 1. Sketch a slider mold volume in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. From the model tree, select SLIDER-SKETCH_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe
5. The left slider volume, created by calculating undercut boundaries, is too small to
be manufactured, so you must sketch a different slider mold volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. Select the Mold tab.
7. From the model tree, select the LEFT_SLIDER_VOL, right-click, and select

Suppress .
 Click OK and de-select all geometry.

8. Click Mold Volume from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
9. Right-click and select Properties.
 Type LOWER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER.

10. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

11. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
12. Select the front workpiece surface as the Sketch Plane.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
13. Select Bottom from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch.

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

15. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

16. Click References from the Setup group.

17. Select datum planes MOLD_RIGHT, MAIN_PARTING_PLN, and the left and right
surfaces of the tab, zooming in if necessary.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
18. Click Close from the References dialog box.
19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension the following sketch.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

20. Click OK .

21. Spin the model slightly and click Change Depth Direction .

22. In the graphics window, right-click the depth handle and select To Selected.
23. Right-click to query and select the inner reference model surface.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

24. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

25. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

Task 2. Sketch a second slider mold volume.

26. Spin the model if necessary and zoom in on the right slider volume.
27. The right slider volume, created by calculating undercut boundaries, has not
completely accounted for the undercut created by the round.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

28. Select the RIGHT_SLIDER_VOL, right-click, and select Suppress .

 Click OK and de-select all geometry.

29. Click Mold Volume .

30. Click Properties from the Controls group.

 Type UPPER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

31. Click Extrude .

32. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
33. Select the right workpiece surface as the Sketch Plane.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
34. Select Bottom from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch.

35. Click Sketch View .

36. Click References .

37. Select datum planes MOLD_FRONT and MAIN_PARTING_PLN as references.
38. Click Close from the References dialog box.

39. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu and
sketch, constrain, and dimension the following sketch.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 9

40. Click OK .

41. Spin the model slightly and click Change Depth Direction .

42. In the graphics window, right-click the depth handle and select To Selected.
43. Right-click to query and select the inner reference model surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 10

44. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

45. Click OK from the Controls group.

46. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

This completes the procedure.

Creating a Reference Part Cutout

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Reference Model
You can create a reference part cutout on a mold volume by selecting Reference

Part Cutout from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu in the
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Volume Tools group. A reference part cutout enables you to remove any
overlapping reference model geometry from the mold volume. The volume of the
reference model is subtracted from the mold volume. This is a very useful feature
because the mold volume will then match the reference model geometry. A
reference part cutout enables you to create a mold volume that completely
encompasses the desired area of the reference model and then create a
reference part cutout feature.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Mold Volume Created

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Reference Part Cutout Created
Creating a reference part cutout is not a requirement when creating mold
volumes. The reference model geometry is automatically cut out of the mold
volumes when the volumes are split (this happens later in the process). Creating
a reference part cutout is a great method to determine if the reference geometry
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

can successfully be cut out during the split process. It can also help you visualize
whether or not you have created a mold volume that captures the desired
reference model geometry.
The reference part cutout option is only available if you are creating a volume or if
you are redefining the volume. The resulting reference part cutout feature
displays in the model tree as a feature called Refpart Cutout id. However, the
mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model tree as
shown in Figure 4:

Enlarge Image

Figure 4 – Reference Part Cutout in Model Tree

Reference Part Cutout Tips

Consider the following tips when creating a reference part cutout for a mold
volume:
 Without creating additional modifications to the volume after the reference part
cutout, the system makes the reference part cutout option unavailable. Therefore,
you cannot cut out a volume twice.
 When more than one reference part is present, the system prompts you to select
one.

Creating a Reference Part Cutout

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Reference-Part_Cutout folder and click OK
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click File > Open and double-click REFPART-CUTOUT.ASM.

Task 1. Create reference part cutouts in mold volumes in a mold

model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select REFPART-CUTOUT_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the rectangular hole in the bottom surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. In the model tree, right-click mold volume UPPER_SLIDER_VOL and select

Unhide .
8. Notice that the mold volume completely consumes the rectangular cut, but it also
occupies volume in the reference model.
9. Notice that the surface of the mold volume is flat.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2
10. Select mold volume UPPER_SLIDER_VOL, right-click, and select Redefine
Mold Volume.

11. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down
menu in the Volume Tools group.

12. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
13. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree.
14. Select reference model REFPART-CUTOUT_REF.PRT, right-click, and select

Hide .

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
15. Notice that the reference model volume has been subtracted from the mold
volume.

16. Right-click REFPART-CUTOUT_REF.PRT and select Unhide .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

17. Pan the model to the right to inspect the LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 mold volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
18. Again, notice that the mold volume completely consumes the tab and also
occupies volume in the reference model.
19. Also notice that the surface of the mold volume is flat.
20. In the model tree, right-click LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 and select Redefine Mold
Volume.

21. Click Reference Part Cutout .

22. Click OK .

23. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree.

24. Notice that the reference model volume has been subtracted from the mold
volume.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
25. Pan the model to the left to inspect LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1.
26. In the model tree, right-click LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1 and select Redefine Mold
Volume.

27. Click Reference Part Cutout .

28. Click OK .

29. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

30. Spin the model and notice that the reference model volume has been subtracted
from the mold volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes

A lifter is another mold component that helps account for undercuts of the inside
of the reference model geometry.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Viewing the Undercut
Because mold components are ultimately created from mold volumes, you can use
sketch-based features to create lifter mold volumes in the mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Lifter Created to Account for Undercut

A lifter is usually attached to the moving side of the mold. It moves at an angle to
free the plastic that comprises the undercut inside the model. Due to their
function, lifters are normally long and narrow.

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Volume_Lifter folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click LIFTER.ASM.

Task 1. Sketch lifter mold volumes in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select LIFTER_WRK.PRT.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the undercut created by the tab.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

7. Select Mold Volume from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

8. Click Properties from the Controls group.

9. Edit the mold volume name to LIFTER_VOL1 and press ENTER.
10. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch Plane.

11. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

12. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

13. Select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

15. Click References from the Setup group and select the bottom of the
workpiece and the tab vertex as references.
 Click Close.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

16. Click Centerline and sketch a vertical and horizontal centerline through the
vertex reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

17. Select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

18. Disable Plane Display .

19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension the sketch as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

20. Click OK .
21. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Both Sides .

 Edit the depth to 8 and click Complete Feature .

22. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
23. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6

24. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down
menu in the Volume Tools group.

25. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes

Before you begin

Training Files:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Volume_Lifter folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click LIFTER2.ASM.

Objectives
 Sketch a lifter volume.

Scenario
Sketch a lifter mold volume that accounts for the undercut in the mold model.

Task 1. Sketch a lifter mold volume that accounts for the undercut in
the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select LIFTER_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Spin the model, as shown, and notice the undercut.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

7. Select Mold Volume from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

8. Click Properties from the Controls group, edit the mold volume Name to
LIFTER_VOL2, and press ENTER.

9. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch Plane and click Extrude
from the Shapes group.

10. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

11. Select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

12. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

13. Click References from the Setup group and select the bottom of the
workpiece, the angled line at the bottom edge of the tab, the rounded edge of the
tab, and the right edge of the hole as references.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

14. Click Line Chain and sketch the shape on the references.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

15. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
16. Zoom in on the top of the sketch.

17. Click Centerline and sketch a vertical centerline through the vertex that is
second from the left.
18. Dimension the sketch as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

19. Disable Plane Display .

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 6

20. Click OK .

21. In the dashboard, edit the depth to To Selected .

 Spin the model so that you can view its underside and select the surface to
extrude to.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
22. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.

 Edit the Side 2 Depth to To Selected and select the surface to extrude to.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

23. Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

24. Spin the model, as shown, and notice that the lifter accounts for the undercut.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9

25. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim Geometry To types drop-down
menu in the Volume Tools group.

26. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 10

27. Select LIFTER_REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide .

28. Spin the model and view the lifter mold volume.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

29. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

30. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to

Geometry

Replacing Surfaces

You can replace a single-mold volume surface with a quilt surface by clicking the

Editing group drop-down menu and selecting Replace . You can use the
Replace option to add volume, remove volume, or simultaneously add and
remove volume. In Figures 2 and 3, the bottom mold volume surface was
replaced with the surface quilt.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Mold Volume Before Surface Replace

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Mold Volume After Surface Replace
By default, the mold volume is “consumed” by the replaced surface feature. That
is, the mold volume is not visible, but still exists previously in the model tree.
When using the Replace option, there is one option available in the Replaced
Surface dialog box:
 Keep quilt – This enables the quilt selected for the replace to remain visible after
the replace is created. In Figure 3, the quilt was not kept after the surface replace
was created.
The Replace option is only available if you are creating a volume or if you are
redefining the volume. The resulting replaced surface feature appears in the
model tree as a feature called Replaced Surface id.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Trimming to Geometry

You can trim surfaces to other geometry in the mold model by selecting Trim To

Geometry from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu in the

Volume Tools group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Trimming a Volume to Geometry

The Trim To Geometry option is only available if you are creating a volume or if
you are redefining the volume. The resulting trim to geometry feature appears in
the model tree as a feature called Trim To Geom id. However, the mold volume
for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model tree.
You can trim to geometry as an alternative to extracting a mold volume up to a
surface. However, trimming to geometry has more powerful capabilities than just
this use. Trimming can only remove volume, not add it.
When trimming surfaces to geometry, you must specify the following:
 Ref Type – Ref Type specifies what the system uses as the trimming entity. You
can specify one of the following:
o Part – This uses a part for trimming.
o Quilt – This uses a quilt for trimming.
o Plane – This uses a plane surface or datum plane for trimming.
 Reference – Reference enables you to specify the item whose geometry will be
used for trimming. The item that you can select depends on the Ref Type that
was specified. Essentially, the Ref Type acts like a filter for the Reference
selection.
 Direction – This enables you to select a trim feature direction. A direction arrow
points in the direction that volume will be trimmed at the reference. You can
select the following references:
o Plane – Plane makes the direction perpendicular to the specified plane.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

o Curve, Edge, or Axis – These make the direction follow the selected curve, edge,
or axis.
o Coordinate System – This makes the direction follow the specified axis of the
selected coordinate system.
 Trim Type – Trim Type enables you to specify which side of the trimming
reference will be used when trimming the mold volume. You can select either of
the following:

o Trim By First Reference – This trims the item by the first reference surface.

o Trim By Last Reference – This trims the item by the last reference surface.
 Offset – This offsets the trimming reference in the direction currently specified
before trimming the geometry.

Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to

Geometry
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Replace_Trim folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click REPLACE-TRIM.ASM.

Task 1. Trim a slider mold volume to existing geometry.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select REPLACE-TRIM_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

6. Spin the model as shown and notice that the slider mold volume passes through
the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. In the model tree, select SLIDER_VOL1, right-click and select Redefine Mold
Volume.

8. Select Trim To Geometry from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down

menu in the Volume Tools group.
9. In the Trim To Geom dialog box, select Quilt as the Ref Type.
10. Select the previously created quilt as the trimming entity.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
11. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT from the model tree as the Direction.
12. Click Flip from the menu manager until the arrow points to the left. The volume to
the left of the trimming entity is to be removed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
13. Click Okay from the menu manager.

14. Click Apply Changes from the Trim To Geom dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
15. Notice that the slider mold volume has been trimmed at the trimming reference.

Task 2. Replace a mold volume surface with a surface quilt.

16. In the model tree, right-click Skirt Surface id 3055 and select Unhide .
17. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.
18. Notice that there is a space between the bottom of the slider mold volume and
the surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

19. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Replace .
20. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
21. Query-select the bottom surface of the slider mold volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
22. Select the large surface quilt.
23. In the Replaced Surface dialog box, select Keep quilt and click Define.
24. Click Yes > Done from the menu manager and click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
25. In the Replaced Surface dialog box, select Keep quilt and click Define.
26. Click No > Done from the menu manager and click OK.

27. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

This completes the procedure.

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes

An insert is another mold component that is typically used as a cost-saving
measure. The mold uses the same core and cavity, but one insert is swapped for
another. Different inserts can be used to create different shapes. Thus, you can
use the same mold to create similar parts simply by switching inserts. In Figure 1,
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

an insert needs to be created for a square cut in the bottom inset of the reference
model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference Model

The resulting insert mold volume is shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing the Completed Insert

However, the model could have a design variation where, rather than a square cut
in the bottom, there is a round cut in the bottom, which is shown in Figure 3.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Design Variations That Can Use Same Core and Cavity
In this case, you can create a different insert mold volume, while you use the same
core and cavity.
You can also use inserts in areas that are difficult to machine.
Because mold components are ultimately created from mold volumes, you can
use sketch-based features to create insert mold volumes in the mold model.

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Volume_Insert folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click INSERT.ASM.

Task 1. Create an insert mold volume in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select INSERT_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the square shape cut into the top of the model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. Notice that the INSERT_VOL mold volume has been started and is partially filling
the square shape.
8. Right-click INSERT_VOL and select Redefine Mold Volume.
9. Press ALT, query-select the top of the existing mold volume, and click Extrude

from the Shapes group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

10. Click Project from the Sketching group and select Loop from the Type
dialog box.
11. Query-select the main top surface of the reference model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
12. In the menu manager, click Next until the square loop is highlighted and click
Accept.
13. Click Close from the Type dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

14. Click OK .

15. Edit the depth to 20 and click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

16. In the model tree, right-click Surface id 1753 and select Unhide .

17. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Replace .
18. Query-select the bottom of the large, square, extruded volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
19. In the graphics window, select Quilt:F14.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
20. Click OK from the Replaced Surface dialog box.

21. In the model tree, right-click Surface id 2746 and select Unhide .
22. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

23. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Replace .
24. Spin the model and select the top of the large, square, extruded volume.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
25. In the graphics window, select Quilt:F15.
26. Click OK from the Replaced Surface dialog box.

27. Select INSERT_REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide .

28. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

29. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down
menu in the Volume Tools group.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9

30. Select Trim To Geometry from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down
menu.
31. In the Trim To Geom dialog box, select Quilt as the Ref Type.
32. Select LIFTER_VOL2 as the Reference.

Enlarge Image
Figure 10
33. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT and click Okay from the menu manager.

34. Click Apply Changes from the Trim To Geom dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

35. Click OK from the Controls group.

36. In the model tree, right-click LIFTER_VOL2 and select Hide .

37. Spin the model and view the completed insert mold volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

This completes the procedure.

Parting Lines

Module Overview:
Parting lines generally define the location where the core, cavity, and other mold
volumes are to be split. In this module, you learn about creating an automatic
parting line using the silhouette curve. You also analyze two specific options
within skirt surface definition: slides and loop selection.

Objectives:
After completing this module, you will be able to:
 Explain the reason for creating parting lines as well as the two methods of
creation.
 Create an automatic parting line using silhouette curves.
 Analyze silhouette curve options including slides and loop selection.

Understanding Parting Lines

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Once the reference model and workpiece are assembled into the mold model,
you need to consider where the workpiece will split into the core and cavity to
open the mold. The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface.
If you create the parting surface automatically using the skirt surface, you must
first create a parting line. The parting line is a collection of datum curves that is
created on the reference model. You can then use the parting line to create the
skirt surface.
There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting line:

 Automatic – The Silhouette Curve tool creates the parting line

automatically.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Silhouette Curve Parting Line Created
A silhouette curve is a datum curve feature that is created where the draft on the
reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed
from a certain direction.
 Manual – You can create datum curves using various modeling techniques to
create the parting line.

You only need to create a parting line if you plan to use the Skirt Surface tool to create the

parting surface.

Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using

Silhouette Curves

You can create an automatic parting line using the Silhouette Curve tool.
This tool creates the parting line by using silhouette curves. A silhouette curve is
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

a datum curve feature that is created where the draft on the reference model
instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from a certain
direction. Figure 3 displays the resulting parting line from the mold model in
Figure 1.

Enlarge
Image
Figure 1 – Mold Model

Enlarge
Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 3 – Silhouette Curve Parting Line

From the mold model standpoint, you must define the following when creating the
silhouette curve:
 Name – This defines the name of the curve as it displays in the model tree. If
desired, you can accept the default name.
 Surface Refs – This specifies the surfaces on which to create the silhouette
curve. By default, the reference model is defined as the surface references. Thus,
the silhouette curve is created on the reference model. If the mold model contains
more than one reference model, you must specify the surface references to be
used, and the surface references must all be selected on the same solid or
reference model.
 Direction – This defines the direction for creating the silhouette curve. By default,
the specified direction is the pull direction, although you can specify a different
direction using any of the following options:
o Plane – Plane makes the direction perpendicular to the specified plane.
o Curve, Edge, or Axis – These make the direction follow the selected curve, edge,
or axis.
o Coordinate System – This makes the direction follow the specified axis of the
selected coordinate system.
In Figure 2, notice that the silhouette curve is created at all draft transitions from
the pull direction.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Silhouette Curve Parting Line
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using

Silhouette Curves
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Line_Automatic folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click AUTO-PART-LINE.ASM.

Task 1. Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that the reference model contains a hole in its top surface.

7. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group.

8. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

9. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide .

10. Spin the model, and notice that the silhouette curve is comprised of two loops.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

11. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Task 2. Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

12. Click Open and double-click COVER-PART-LINE.ASM.

13. Select the COVER-PART-LINE_WRK.PRT.
14. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
15. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
16. Select the Mold tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
17. Notice that the reference model contains four circular holes and one rectangular
hole.

18. Click Silhouette Curve .

19. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
20. Zoom in on the top of the model and notice that there is a curve around each hole
in the top surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
21. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
22. Notice that there is another curve around the entire bottom edge of the reference
model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
23. Notice that there is only one silhouette curve feature created in the model tree.
24. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

25. Select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
26. Notice that there is a curve created at every location where the draft
instantaneously changes from positive to negative.

27. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Mold Model and Slider Mold Volumes

Recall that a silhouette curve is created in a mold model where the draft on the
reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed
from the pull direction. Because undercut areas can also cause draft to
instantaneously change, the system may also create the silhouette curve along
undercut geometry zones.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Silhouette Curve without Slides Specified

The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that already account for
undercut geometry zones in the reference model. When mold volumes are
specified, the system automatically excludes these unnecessary edges and
creates correct parting curves.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Silhouette Curve with Slides Specified

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides

Before you begin

Training Files:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Line_Slides folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CURVE-SLIDES.ASM.

Task 1. Specify mold volumes to exclude undercut areas during

silhouette curve creation.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the CURVE-SLIDES_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that the mold model contains three slider mold volumes.

7. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group.

8. Click Preview from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
9. Notice that the system attempts to create the same silhouette curves for the
undercut geometry that the slider mold volumes already created.
10. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, select Slides and click Define.
11. Press CTRL and select the three slider mold volumes.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
12. Click Done Refs > Done/Return from the menu manager.
13. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
14. Notice that the system no longer creates silhouette curves for the undercut
geometry.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop

Selection

Including and Excluding Silhouette Curve Loops

During silhouette curve creation, the system may create curves along edges that
you do not want included. You can selectively remove curves along edges that
you do not want curves created for using the Loop Selection option in the
Silhouette Curve dialog box.
Selecting the Loop Selection option causes the Loop Selection dialog box to
appear. The Loops tab in the Loop Selection dialog box lists the loops of curves
which comprise the silhouette curve, and whether their status is Included or
Excluded. When you select a loop in the dialog box, it highlights in the mold
model.
Loops are typically created at every location in the mold model where there is a
shutoff. A shutoff is any surface where the mold core and cavity contact. When
the mold closes the core and cavity it creates a seal that shuts off that area of the
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

mold. One loop typically is created along the exterior of the reference model.
Other loops are created at each interior hole or cut. Loops are also created at
areas of undercut geometry.
Loops are, by default, included in the final silhouette curve, although you can
exclude any loop from the final silhouette curve. The most common reason loops
are excluded is because the shutoff at that specific location is being formed by a
slider or saddle. In Figure 1, the two loops around the opening are excluded.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Included Versus Excluded Loops
Another way to exclude loops created by undercuts is to use the Slides Silhouette Curve option.

Specifying Edges for Silhouette Curve Creation

When the system encounters a vertical surface or a surface that has no draft for
which a silhouette curve loop is to be included, the system may select the wrong
edge to create the silhouette curve along. In most cases you can change which
edge to create the silhouette curve along. The following status options are
available:
 Upper – The chain is currently located at the uppermost edges of a vertical
surface. The upper edge is higher relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull direction,
as shown in the left image of Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Upper Versus Lower Chains
When the chain is specified as upper, the shutoff effectively causes the mold
feature to occur in the core mold component.
 Lower – The chain is currently located at the lowermost edges of a vertical
surface. The lower edge is lower relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull direction,
as shown in the right image of Figure 2. When the chain is specified as lower, the
shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur in the cavity mold component.
 Single – You cannot move the chain for a Single location because the edges that
the chain lies on are associated with a drafted surface.
The Chains tab in the Loop Selection dialog box displays both the chain number,
and its status. The chain number is displayed as A-B, where A is the
corresponding loop number from the Loops tab that the chain belongs to, and B
is an incremental number for multiple chains belonging to a single loop, starting
with 0. For example, if there are three chains belonging to loop number 1, then
the three chains are numbered 1-0, 1-1, and 1-2.

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop

Selection
Before you begin

Training Files:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Line_Loop folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click LOOP-SELECTION.ASM.

Task 1. Exclude loops of a silhouette curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the model tree, right-click LOOP-SELECTION_WRK.PRT and select Hide

3. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group.

4. Click Preview from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
5. Notice the silhouette curve that is to be created.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, select Loop Selection and click Define.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

7. Notice that the Loop Selection dialog box contains three loops.
 Select loop number 1.
8. Notice that this outer loop highlights blue in the graphics window. You want to
keep this loop.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
9. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select loop number 2.
10. Notice that this loop is on the right side of the opening.
 You later handle this opening using a method other than silhouette curves, so it needs to be excluded
from the silhouette curve.

11. In the Loop Selection dialog box, click Exclude.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
12. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select loop number 3 and notice that this loop is
on the left side of the opening.
 Again, you handle this opening using a method other than silhouette curves, so it needs to be excluded
from the silhouette curve.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

13. In the Loop Selection dialog box, click Exclude.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

Task 2. Switch the location of chains for a loop in a silhouette curve.

14. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select the Chains tab.
 Select chain number 1-0.
 Notice that its status is Single. This chain is on a drafted surface and cannot be
changed.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
15. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select chain number 1-1.
 Press CTRL and select chain number 1-2.
 Notice that both of their Statuses are Upper.
 Notice that both chains are to be created on the upper edges of the vertical
surfaces.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
16. In the Loop Selection dialog box, click Lower to switch both chains to the lower
edges of the vertical surfaces.
 Click OK.
17. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Understanding Parting Surfaces

The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface. The parting
surface is generally perpendicular to the pull direction and lies between the
parting line edges of the reference model and the outside walls of the workpiece.
There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting surface:

 Automatic – The Skirt Surface tool creates the parting surface

automatically.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Parting Surface Created Automatically

If you use the skirt surface tool, you must first create a parting line to use.
 Manual – You can create the parting surface using basic and advanced surface
creation techniques.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Parting Surface Created Manually

Parting Surface Criteria

You must remember the following criteria when creating parting surfaces:
 A parting surface must intersect the workpiece or mold volume completely. You
can merge multiple surfaces together.
 A parting surface cannot intersect itself.
 You can use any surface as a parting surface as long as the first two criteria are
met.
 Parting surface features are created at the assembly level in the mold model.

Creating a Skirt Surface

You can create the parting surface for a mold model by using Parting Surface

in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. The system can help you

automatically create a parting surface by using the Skirt Surface tool. This
tool helps you automatically create a parting surface by creating a skirt surface.
The skirt surface can be considered as a “super feature.” It contains numerous
options that you can define to help account for different types of model geometry.
The parting surface is ultimately used to split the mold model into the mold core
and mold cavity. You can think of the parting surface as the location of all metal-
to-metal contact between the mold core and cavity.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

To create the skirt surface you must specify the curves that the system should
use. You can specify curves in any of the following ways:
 One By One – Enables you to select individual curves or edges.
 Curve Chain – Enables you to select a chain of curves.
 Feat Curves – Enables you to select all curves that belong to the specified
feature.
The skirt surface is usually created by specifying an existing parting line
silhouette curve.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing the Silhouette Curve Parting Line

The silhouette curve is selected using the Feat Curves method of specifying
curves. However, if you do not want to use the entire silhouette curve, or if you
want to use the silhouette curve in conjunction with other datum curves, you can
use the Curve Chain or One By One options.
The Ref Model, Workpiece, and Direction must also be defined to create the skirt
surface. However, if the process workflow has been followed, these items should
have already been automatically defined for you. The Ref Model is the reference
model used in the mold model, the Workpiece is the workpiece used in the mold
model, and the Direction is the pull direction of the mold model.
Once you have specified these items, the system classifies each closed loop of
curves into one of two types:
 Inner loops – Loops that are filled by the skirt surface.
 Outer loops – Loops that the skirt surface extends outward through.
Usually, the system is able to automatically determine the loop classifications.
Once the classifications are made, the system automatically creates the skirt
parting surface feature by doing the following:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 It fills the inner holes (shutoffs) in the reference model using the inner loops from
the Silhouette curve or other selected datum curve. In Figure 2, all five interior
shutoffs have been filled using loops from the specified silhouette curve.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing the Completed Skirt Surface

 It extends the outer loops of the Silhouette curve or other datum curve to the
boundaries of the workpiece. In Figure 2, the skirt surface extends out to the
boundaries of the workpiece.
Similar to mold volumes, you can rename the parting surface by starting the
Parting Surface tool, right-clicking, and selecting Properties, or clicking

Properties from the Controls group.

Creating a Skirt Surface

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Skirt-Surface folder and click OK
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click File > Open and double-click SKIRT-SURFACE.ASM.

Task 1. Create a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the SKIRT-SURFACE_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Select the silhouette curve that has already been created.
7. Notice that the silhouette curve consists of six loops – one around the entire
reference model and one loop each for each interior shutoff.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

8. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

9. Click Skirt Surface from the Surfacing group.

10. Select the silhouette curve and click Done from the menu manager.
11. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

12. Click OK from the Controls group.

13. Notice that all five interior silhouette curve loops have been filled by the skirt
surface.
14. Notice also that the skirt surface has been extended from the outer silhouette
curve loop to the sides of the workpiece.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
15. Spin the model so that you can view the underside of the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

Task 2. Edit the silhouette curve chain status to modify the skirt
surface.
16. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs.
17. Notice that the skirt surface for each shutoff is located on the outer reference
model surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
18. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
19. Edit the definition of SILH_CURVE_1.
20. Click Suspend All from the menu manager to temporarily suspend the skirt
surface feature.
21. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection.
22. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select the Chains tab.
 Select chain 2-1, press CTRL, and select chains 4-1, 5-1, and 6-1.
 Click Lower to switch the status of the four loops.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
23. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
24. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs.
25. Notice that the skirt surface is located on the inner reference model surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
26. Spin the model so that you can view the underside of the reference model and
inspect the skirt surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend

Curves
By default, all curves selected for the skirt surface are extended either inward or
outward to create the surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge
Image
Figure 1 – Default Skirt Surface
The Extend Curves option provides a further level of control to exclude curves
from being extended.
The Extend Curves tab in the Extension Control dialog box contains two columns:
 Include Curve – Specifies which curve segments are extended in the skirt
surface.
 Exclude Curve – Specifies which curve segments are not extended in the skirt
surface.
Every curve specified for the skirt surface is broken up into segments. Each
segment is displayed in the Extend Curves tab. By default, all curve segments
are located in the Include Curve column of the tab, meaning that they are all
extended. You can exclude curve segments from being extended by moving
them over to the Exclude Curve column of the tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge
Image
Figure 2 – Curve Segments Excluded

Enlarge
Image
Figure 3 – Additional Curve Segment Excluded
When you place the cursor over a given curve segment it highlights in the
graphics window so you can determine where it is located in the reference model.
When creating a skirt surface, you can either select an entire silhouette curve and
then exclude curve segments as desired, or you can simply select the desired
curves one by one for the skirt surface definition. Either way, you achieve the
same resultant skirt surface. The method you use is determined by what is most
efficient. For example, if there are 20 segments in a silhouette curve and you
need 18 of them for the skirt surface, it would be most efficient to select the entire
silhouette curve and then exclude the two unneeded curve segments.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Conversely, if you only need 2 of the 20 curve segments, it would be more

efficient to individually select the two desired curves, rather than selecting the
entire curve and then excluding the unneeded 18 curve segments.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend

Curves
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Skirt-Surface_Extend folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click EXTEND-CURVES.ASM.

Task 1. Exclude curves from a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Notice the silhouette curve that has already been created.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

4. Click Skirt Surface tool from the Surfacing group.

5. Select the silhouette curve and click Done from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
6. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

7. Click Repaint .
8. Notice that the surface extends out from all curve segments of the silhouette
curve.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
9. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension.
10. In the Extension Control dialog box, select Curve 213.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

11. Notice that the curve segment highlights in the graphics window.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
12. In the Extension Control dialog box, press SHIFT and select Curve 216.
13. Notice that all four curve segments are selected and highlight in the graphics
window.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
14. Click Exclude Curve to exclude these curve segments.
15. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.
16. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

17. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
18. Notice that the skirt surface is not created through the excluded curve segments.
19. Edit the definition of the Skirt Surface id 223.
20. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension.
21. In the Extension Control dialog box, select Curve 213 and click Include Curve
.
 Click OK.
22. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent

Conditions
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces on the reference
model to which the resulting skirt surface must be tangent when extending
through the parting line curves.
You must specify the following when defining tangent conditions for the skirt
surface:
 Tangent surfaces – Specify the reference model surfaces adjacent to the parting
curve to which the skirt surface must be tangent.
 Include Curve – The skirt surface must extend through these curves tangent to
the adjacent surfaces. By default, all curves adjacent to the selected surfaces are
included.
 Exclude Curve – The tangent condition is not applied to the curves in this column
of the Tangent Conditions tab.
In Figure 1, no tangent conditions have been applied to the resulting skirt surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – No Tangent Condition Applied to Skirt Surface

In Figure 2, the tangent condition has been applied to all outer surfaces of the
reference model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Tangent Condition Applied to Skirt Surface

Consequently, the skirt surface extends through the parting line tangent to the
adjacent surfaces. However, in Figure 3, all but the left and right curves have
been excluded from the tangent condition.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Curves Excluded from Tangent Condition

As a result, the skirt surface is only tangent to the left and right reference model
surfaces.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent

Conditions
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Skirt-Surface_Tangent folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click TANGENT-COND.ASM.

Task 1. Create an automatic parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select TANGENT-COND_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.

6. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

7. Click Skirt Surface from the Surfacing group.

8. Select silhouette curve PART-LINE and click Done from the menu manager.
9. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

10. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
11. Notice that the parting surface extends normal to the workpiece boundary.

Task 2. Set tangent conditions for the skirt surface.

12. Edit the definition of Skirt Surface id 388.
13. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension.
14. In the Extension Control dialog box, select the Tangent Conditions tab.

15. In the Tangent Conditions tab, click Select Tangent Surfaces .

16. Press CTRL and select the eight outer surfaces that are adjacent to the silhouette
curve.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
17. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
18. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.
19. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box.
20. Spin the model and notice that the skirt surface now extends tangent to the
surfaces adjacent to the silhouette curve.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
21. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

22. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension and select the Tangent
Conditions tab.

23. In the Extension Control dialog box, click Select Included Curves .

 Press CTRL and select the six curves highlighted green.

 Click OK from the Select dialog box.
 Click Exclude Curve and click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
24. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 5
25. Spin the model and notice that, while the skirt surface still extends from the
selected curves, it is only tangent to the curves included in the tangent
conditions.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension

Directions
By default, when the skirt surface extends from a silhouette curve, it extends
normal to the curve. The direction of extension is defined at every curve segment
endpoint. If the directions at the curve endpoints overlap, the skirt surface will fail.
You can modify the direction of extension for the curve endpoints in the
Extension Directions tab of the Extension Control dialog box. This enables you to
significantly change the resulting shape of the skirt surface. For example, in
Figure 1, the extension directions for the left side of the skirt surface have been
modified, causing the resulting shape to be different.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Extension Direction Modified
When you select the Extension Directions tab, the extension directions for each
of the curve segment endpoints displays in the graphics window.
Consider the following points regarding extension directions:
 Default extension directions display with orange arrows, as shown in Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing Default Extension Directions

 Extension directions that you have modified or added display with cyan arrows,
as shown in Figure 3.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Viewing User-Defined Extension Directions

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 If you apply tangent conditions to curve segments for the skirt surface, the
extension directions display with red arrows.

Modifying and Adding Extension Directions

You can modify extension directions as a means to solve a failing skirt surface, or
you can modify them simply to modify the shape of the resulting parting surface.
You can also add additional extension directions.
To modify or add an extension direction, you must specify the following:
 Location – You can either select an existing included extend curve endpoint or
create a datum point at a new location where you want to add an extension
direction.
 Direction reference – This specifies the direction in which the skirt surface will be
extended. You can select any of the following references:
o Plane – The skirt surface is extended perpendicular to the plane. You can select
either datum planes or planar surfaces.
o Curve, Edge, or Axis – The skirt surface is extended along the direction of the
specified curve, edge, or axis.
o Coordinate System – The skirt surface is extended along the specified coordinate
system axis, which you must specify.
Each added or modified extension direction displays in the Extension Directions
tab as a point set. For each defined point set, you can perform the following
operations:
 Remove – This enables you to remove the point set.
 Redefine – This enables you to select a different location for the point set.
 Direction – This enables you to select a different direction reference.
You can also add new point sets.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension

Directions
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Skirt-Surface_Direction folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click EXTEND-DIR.ASM.

Task 1. Modify the extension directions of a skirt surface in a mold

model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.

6. Click Parting Surface and click Skirt Surface .

7. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT, select the silhouette curve, and click Done from
the menu manager.
8. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box.
9. Notice that the skirt surface fails.
10. Also notice the warning message in the Message Log.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
11. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension.
12. Notice the warning message and notice where the problem is occurring based on
the highlighted curve segments.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
13. Click OK from the Warning dialog box.
14. Select the Extension Directions tab.
15. Notice the default direction arrows at the problem area at the lower right are
pointing in two different directions.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
16. In the Extension Directions tab, click Add.
 Select the vertex shown.
 Click Done from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
17. Select the right workpiece surface and click Okay from the menu manager.
18. Notice the new user-defined direction at the vertex.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
19. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.
20. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and rotate the model to observe
the parting surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

Task 2. Add an extension direction to a skirt surface.

21. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Saved Orientations and select BACK.
22. Notice that the bottom of the skirt surface curves upward.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

23. Click Saved Orientations and select 3D.

24. Enable Plane Display and Point Display .

25. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension and select the Extension
Directions tab.
 Click Add.
 Prehighlight datum point PNT0 and select it.
 Click Done from the menu manager.
26. Prehighlight datum plane EXTENSION_DIR, select it, and click Okay from the
menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
27. Notice the new user-defined direction and click OK from the Extension Control
dialog box.
28. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

29. Click OK from the Controls group.

30. Spin the model and observe the skirt surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9

31. Disable Plane Display and Point Display .

32. Orient to the BACK view orientation and notice that the surface no longer curves
upward.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 10

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff

Extension
By default, the outer loops of a specified silhouette curve are extended to the
boundaries of the workpiece. This may cause an undesirable shape in the
resulting core and cavity mold components.
You can specify a shutoff extension to stop the skirt surface from extending all
the way out to the workpiece boundaries by using the ShutOff Ext option in the
Skirt Surface dialog box. The ShutOff Ext option enables you to specify the
amount of extension toward the workpiece boundaries that the skirt surface will
undergo before stopping, extending in the pull direction, and finally stopping at
the workpiece boundaries. There are two methods available for specifying the
shutoff extension location:
 ShutOff Dist – Specifies a uniform offset value around the silhouette curve
perimeter that the skirt surface will extend. In Figure 1, a shutoff distance of 2
was specified.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Shutoff Distance Specified for Shutoff Extension
 Boundary – Enables you to specify your own boundary that the skirt surface will
extend out to. You can use either of the following two methods to specify the
boundary:
o Select – Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary. In Figure 2,
the sketch created on the top surface of the workpiece was selected as the
boundary.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Selected Boundary Shutoff Extension
o Sketch – Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fly by specifying the sketch
plane, reference plane, and reference direction. In Figure 3, the boundary was
sketched on the top surface of the workpiece.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Sketched Boundary Shutoff Extension


Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form a closed
loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a specific sketching
plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular to the pull direction.
However, the boundary is ultimately extended in the pull direction, so if the
boundary is created on a plane that is not normal to the pull direction, you may
not get the expected result.
When the skirt surface extends outward from the silhouette curve, it stops either
at the workpiece boundaries or a shutoff extension, whichever it encounters first.
If the selected boundary falls outside of the workpiece boundaries, the skirt
surface will stop at the workpiece boundaries. In Figure 3, only one of the four
sides of the sketched square boundary falls within the workpiece boundaries.
Hence, the skirt surface stops extending at the workpiece boundaries on three
sides, and at the sketched boundary on the fourth side.

Specifying the ShutOff Plane

The ShutOff Plane option is used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension
option. The shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension
extends to. The shutoff extension extends in the positive or negative Z-axis (pull
direction) up to the shutoff plane and finally extends outward again to the
workpiece boundaries. The shutoff plane specified in all three figures is the one
that is displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

While the ShutOff Plane is optional in the Skirt Surface dialog box, it is a required
reference if a shutoff extension is defined. Without the shutoff plane defined, the
shutoff extension does not extend at all in the Z-axis, and therefore is not used.
The following rules apply to the shutoff plane reference specified:
 The reference you specify must be planar.
 There can be only one shutoff plane specified.
 The shutoff plane must be normal to the pull direction.
 The shutoff plane may be above the skirt surface. However, the resulting
extension may not create valid geometry for a mold parting line.

Specifying the Draft Angle

The Draft Angle option is also used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension
option, although it is not a requirement. The draft angle option drafts the Z-
direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by the specified draft angle value. You
might want to apply a draft angle to these surfaces to help with wear in the
resulting mold core and cavity. Note that you can only specify a positive draft
angle. The draft angle specified in all three figures is 6.

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff

Extension
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Skirt-Surface_ShutOff folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHUTOFF-EXT.ASM.

Task 1. Create a shutoff extension by specifying an offset distance.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Select SHUTOFF-EXT_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the skirt surface shape.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
7. Edit the definition of Skirt Surface id 1501.
8. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
9. In the menu manager, click ShutOff Dist, type 2 as the value, and press ENTER.

10. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and click Repaint .

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

11. Notice that there is no difference in the skirt surface shape.

12. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Plane.
 Select datum plane SHUTOFF and click Done/Return from the menu manager.
 Click Preview.

13. Click Repaint and notice that the shutoff extension now extends to the
shutoff plane.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
14. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Draft Angle.
 Type 6 as the value, press ENTER, and click Preview.

15. Click Repaint and notice that the shutoff extension surfaces have been
drafted.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 2. Select a new shutoff extension boundary.

16. Double-click ShutOff Ext.
17. In the menu manager, click Boundary > Select > One By One.
18. Query-select the entire SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch and click Done from the
menu manager.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

19. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and click Repaint .

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
20. Notice the new shutoff extension shape.
21. Notice that the shutoff extension still extends to the shutoff plane.
22. Notice that the shutoff extension surfaces are still drafted.

Task 3. Sketch a new shutoff extension boundary.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

23. Double-click ShutOff Ext.

24. In the menu manager, click Boundary > Sketch.
25. Select the top workpiece surface as the sketch plane.
26. Click Okay > Default from the menu manager.
27. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT and the right workpiece surface as
references, and click Close from the References dialog box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7

28. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

29. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu and
sketch, constrain, and dimension the sketch, as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

30. Click OK .
31. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9

This completes the procedure.

Creating the Shower Head Parting Surface

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shower-Head_Skirt folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Create an automatic parting line using a silhouette curve.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Create a skirt parting surface by using a silhouette curve as a reference.

Scenario
In this exercise, you create an automatic parting line using a silhouette curve in
the mold model. You then use that silhouette curve as the reference to create the
skirt surface in the model.

Task 1. Create the silhouette curve parting line.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. In the model tree, press CTRL and select Extrude 1 (SLIDER_LEFT_TAB -
MOLD VOLUME), Extrude 2 (SLIDER_RIGHT_TAB - MOLD VOLUME) and
Extrude 3 (PLUG_VOL - MOLD VOLUME).

7. Right-click and select Hide .

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

8. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group.

9. Click Preview from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

10. Query-select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
11. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection.
12. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select loop 2, press SHIFT, and select loop 6.
 Click Exclude to exclude the selected loops.
 Click OK.
13. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

Task 2. Create the parting surface.

14. In the model tree, select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_REF.PRT, right-click, and

select Unhide .

15. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

16. Click Skirt Surface from the Surfacing group.

17. Select the SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_WRK.PRT.
18. Select the silhouette curve and click Done from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
19. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box, and notice that creation of the
skirt surface fails.
20. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension and click OK from the
Warning dialog box.
21. Notice that the area that cannot be extended is highlighted red at the front of the
reference model and in the Extension Control dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
22. In the Extension Control dialog box, select the Extension Directions tab.
23. In the Extension Directions tab, click Add.
 Notice that the front edge vertex of the reference model has default direction
arrows pointing in two directions.
 Select the front edge vertex and click Done from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

24. Enable Plane Display .

25. Query-select datum plane EXTEND_REF as the extension direction reference.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

26. Click Flip > Okay from the menu manager.

27. Disable Plane Display .

28. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.

29. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and click Repaint .
30. Notice that the skirt surface is now created.
31. Spin the model and notice that the surface is not smooth.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
32. Notice also that the surface does not extend to the workpiece boundaries.
33. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
34. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension and select the Extension
Directions tab.
35. In the Extension Directions tab, click Add.
36. Click and drag a window around the two left vertices.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
37. Click Done from the menu manager.
 If you zoom in on either of the left orange default direction arrows, you observe that there are actually
two different vertices very close to one another. Hence, when you drag the window around the vertices
to select them, you are actually selecting four vertices.

38. Query-select the left workpiece surface and click Okay from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
39. In the Extension Control dialog box, click Add and select the rear vertex.
40. Click Done from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 11
41. Query-select the rear workpiece surface and click Okay from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 12
42. In the Extension Control dialog box, click Add and drag a window around the two
right vertices.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 13
43. Click Done from the menu manager.
 Again, there are actually four vertices being selected.

44. Select the right workpiece surface and click Okay from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 14
45. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.
46. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box.
47. Spin the model and notice that the surface is now smooth, and that it also
extends to the workpiece boundaries.

Enlarge Image

Figure 15
48. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
49. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
50. In the menu manager, click Boundary > Sketch.
51. Select the top workpiece surface as the sketching plane and click Okay > Default
from the menu manager.
52. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT and the front workpiece surfaces as
references and click Close from the References dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 16

53. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

54. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu and
sketch, constrain, and dimension the rectangle, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 17

55. Click OK .
56. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Plane.

57. Enable Plane Display .

58. Select datum plane SHUTOFF_PLANE and click Done/Return from the menu
manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 18

59. Disable Plane Display .

60. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Draft Angle.
61. Type 6 as the draft angle and press ENTER.
62. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

63. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 19
64. Spin the model and inspect the skirt surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 20

65. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

66. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation

Tools
When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and manipulate quilts to
achieve your desired design intent. You can use the following tools to edit and
manipulate surfaces.
Surface editing and manipulation tools are covered in greater detail in PTC's surfacing courses.

Extending Surfaces

You can extend a quilt using either of the following methods:

 Extend Original Surface — Extends the surface boundary edge chain along
the original surface. This option has three additional options that determine how
the extension is created:
o Same — Creates the extension of the same type as the original surface (for
example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface). The original surface is
extended past its selected boundary edge chain, and does not create an
additional surface patch. This is the default extend option.
o Tangent — Creates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to the original
surface. With this option an additional surface patch is created.
o Approximate — Creates the extension as a boundary blend between the
boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the extension. This
method is useful when extending the surface up to a vertex that does not lie
along a straight edge. With this option an additional surface patch is created.

 Extend Surface To Plane — Extends the boundary edge chain up to a

specified plane in the direction normal to this plane. With this option an additional
surface patch is created.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Extending a Surface to Plane

Trimming Surfaces

A surface trim is analogous to a solid cut, except that it trims away a portion of a
surface. You can create a surface trim as an extrude, revolve, sweep, blend, and
so on. You can also trim a selected surface quilt using other geometry such as
planes, quilts, and curves or edges.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Trimming a Quilt using Geometry
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Once you have specified the surface to be trimmed and the entity to do the
trimming, you must specify which side is to be kept. You can opt to keep one
side, the other side, or both sides.

Copying and Pasting Surfaces

Copying and pasting surfaces enables you to create an overlay of a surface so

that you can then perform manipulations to the copied surface. You can copy and
paste any surface or surface set, either from a quilt or a solid. You can use either

CTRL+C and CTRL+V or the Copy and Paste icons from the
Operations group in the ribbon. You should only use the Copy functionality in
situations where you do not have proper references to create the parting
surfaces. The copy functionality can result in a lot of surface features, especially
when you are working with a complex design.

Offsetting Surfaces

You can create a surface quilt offset a distance value from another quilt or a solid
surface. The offset surface remains dependent on the original surface. When
offsetting surfaces, you can specify the fit type as either Normal to Surface,
Automatic Fit, or Controlled Fit.

Mirroring Surfaces

You can transform a surface quilt by mirroring it. To mirror a quilt, select the quilt

and click Mirror , specifying a reference plane for the mirror. A new surface
feature is created.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Mirroring a Quilt

Merging Surfaces

You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts to create surfaces with
2-sided edges. Merging surfaces is covered more in depth in other topics.

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation

Tools
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Surface_Manipulate folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click EDIT-MANIPULATE.PRT.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 1. Extend a surface in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Select feature Revolve 1 and select the top surface edge.

3. Click Extend from the Editing group.

4. In the dashboard, click Extend Surface To Plane and select datum plane
EXTEND from the model tree.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

5. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

6. De-select all geometry.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

Task 2. Trim a surface in a part model.

7. Select Revolve 1.
8. Select Quilt:F5.

9. Click Trim from the Editing group.

10. Select the projected curve.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

11. Click Complete Feature .

12. De-select all geometry.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

Task 3. Mirror the quilt in the part model.

13. Select Revolve 1 and select Quilt:F5.

14. Click Mirror from the Editing group and select datum plane MIRROR.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

15. Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

16. De-select all geometry.

Task 4. Offset a quilt in the part model.

17. Select Revolve 1 and select Quilt:F5.

18. Click Offset from the Editing group.

19. In the dashboard, type 40 as the offset value and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6

20. Click Complete Feature .

21. De-select all geometry.

Task 5. Copy and paste a portion of a surface quilt.

22. Disable Plane Display .

23. Edit the selection filter to Geometry.
24. Query-select the lowest surface of the mirrored quilt.
25. Press CTRL and query-select the highest surface of the mirrored quilt.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
26. Press CTRL+C to copy the surfaces and press CTRL+V to paste the surfaces.

27. Click Complete Feature .

28. In the model tree, select Mirror 1, right-click, and select Hide .

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

This completes the procedure.

Merging Surfaces
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts. Merging a quilt makes
it selectable as a single entity for other operations, and is required for operations
such as creating solids from quilts.
Remember the following:
 Surfaces are shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges.
 Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges.
 Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges because they border two surface
patches.
Therefore:
 Merging a surface results in the creation of two-sided edges from one-sided
edges. In Figure 2, the adjacent quilt surface edges are separate, one-sided
edges, as they display in orange.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Surfaces Edge Display of Separate Quilts
In Figure 3, the quilts have been merged to form two-sided, purple edges.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Surface Merge Keep Options
 Merged surface edges appear in purple.

Merge Options

There are two types of merge operations, used for different surface geometry:
 Intersect – Primarily used for intersecting quilts, when a trimming effect is
desired, although it can be used on adjacent quilts. The Intersect option provides
up to two flip arrows, enabling four possible geometry outcomes, as shown in
Figure 1.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Surface Edge Display of Merged Quilts
Intersect is the default merge option.
 Join – Recommended for use on adjacent quilts. Join can also be used to join
surfaces when no trimming effect is desired. For example, you could join two
surfaces that meet in a “T,” without having to decide which sides to keep.

Merging Surfaces
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Surface_Operations\Merge folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MERGE.PRT.

Task 1. Merge surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the oval surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Press CTRL and select the boundary surface.

4. In the ribbon, click Merge from the Editing group.

5. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
 Select Intersect, if necessary.

6. Click Preview Feature .

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

7. Click Resume Feature .

8. In the Merge dashboard, click Change Second Quilt Side .

9. Click Preview Feature .

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2

10. Click Resume Feature .

11. In the graphics window, click both arrows to flip them.

12. Click Preview Feature .

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

13. Click Resume Feature .

14. In the dashboard, click Change Second Quilt Side .

15. Click Complete Feature and de-select all geometry.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 4

Task 2. Join surfaces in a part model.

16. In the model tree, press CTRL and select JOIN1, JOIN2, and JOIN3.

17. Right-click and select Unhide .

18. De-select all geometry.

19. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style
types drop-down menu.
20. Notice the one-sided orange edges between the main surface and the three
“joined” surfaces.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
21. Press CTRL and select the main center quilt and right quilt.

22. In the ribbon, click Merge from the Editing group.

23. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
 Select Join.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
24. Press CTRL and drag a window around all quilts to select them.

25. Click Complete Feature and de-select all geometry.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
26. Notice that the edges between the main surface and three joined surfaces are
two-sided purple edges.

27. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Creating a Shadow Surface

A shadow surface is another type of parting surface you can create automatically.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Viewing Mold Model
The Shadow Surface tool drapes a parting surface on top of the reference part
geometry.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Viewing a Shadow Surface
The following are prerequisites for creating a shadow surface:
 The workpiece must be visible (it cannot be hidden or blanked).
 The model must be completely drafted.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Comparison of Shadow Surfaces and Skirt Surfaces

Because both skirt surfaces and shadow surfaces can be used to automatically
create a parting, consider the following comparisons:
 The skirt surface requires a silhouette curve while a shadow surface does not.
 The skirt surface may have vertical surfaces because the silhouette curve
determines the upper or lower loop of the non-drafted sections. Since the shadow
surface does not use a silhouette curve, a design model must be fully drafted.
 With the skirt surface, you can exclude segments that fail. The shadow surface
has no option to exclude failed segments.
 There is no extension control with the shadow surface. You cannot extend
curves, specify tangent conditions, or modify extension directions.

Shadow Surface Options

The following options are available when creating a shadow surface:

 Boundary Reference – Defines the outer limits of the shadow surface. Depending
on the reference model and workpiece, you may have to specify the workpiece as
the boundary reference.
 Direction – Specifies the direction that the shadow surface is draped onto the
reference model. By default, the direction is opposite that of the pull direction.
 Clip Plane – Specifies the location where the shadow surface stops.
 Loop Closure – Specifies the loops that the shadow surface closes. By default,
the system closes all inner loops of the reference model, but you can select
specific loops if desired.
 ShutOff Ext – Enables you to specify the amount of extension toward the
boundary references that the shadow surface will undergo before stopping,
extending in the pull direction, and finally stopping at the boundary references.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 3 – Specifying a ShutOff Extension

When the shadow surface extends outward, it stops either at the boundary
references or a shutoff extension, whichever it encounters first. If the selected
boundary falls outside of the boundary references, the shadow surface will stop at
the boundary references. There are two methods available for specifying the
shutoff extension location:
o ShutOff Dist – Specifies a uniform offset value around the reference model
perimeter that the shadow surface will extend.
o Boundary – Enables you to specify your own boundary that the shadow surface
will extend out to. You can use either of the following two methods to specify the
boundary:
 Select – Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary.
 Sketch – Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fly by specifying the sketch
plane, reference plane, and reference direction.

Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form a closed
loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a specific sketching
plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular to the pull direction. However,
the boundary is ultimately extended in the pull direction, so if the boundary is
created on a plane that is not normal to the pull direction, you may not get the
expected result.
 Draft Angle – Used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, the draft
angle option drafts the Z-direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by the
specified draft angle value. Specifying a draft angle is optional.
 ShutOff Plane – Used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, the
shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension extends to. The
shutoff plane is optional for a shadow surface, but it is a required reference if a
shutoff extension is defined.
 Shadow Slides – Enables you to specify mold volumes to attach to the reference
model. The resulting shadow surface drapes over the specified mold volumes.
Like the reference model, the mold volume must be fully drafted to successfully
create the shadow surface.

Creating a Shadow Surface

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shadow-Surface folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHADOW-SURF.ASM.

Task 1. Create a shadow surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

2. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
3. Click the Surfacing group drop-down menu and select Shadow Surface.
4. Select SHADOW-SURF_WRK.PRT as the Boundary Reference.
5. Click OK from the Shadow Surface dialog box.

6. Click OK from the Controls group.

7. In the model tree, select SHADOW-SURF.PRT, press CTRL, and select

SHADOW-SURF_WRK.PRT.

8. Right-click and select Hide .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
9. Select the shadow surface.
10. Select the shadow surface quilt.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
11. Notice that the mold volume does not influence the resulting shadow surface.

Task 2. Specify a shadow slide.

12. In the model tree, right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition .
13. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click Shadow Slides.
14. Click Volume Sel from the menu manager and select the mold volume.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
15. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
16. Click OK from the Shadow Surface dialog box.

17. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Hide .

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
18. Notice that the shadow surface was also draped over the top of the mold volume.

19. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition .

20. Double-click Shadow Slides.
21. Click Volume Sel > Remove All > Confirm > Done/Return from the menu
manager.
22. Click OK.

Task 3. Specify a shutoff extension.

23. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition .

24. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

25. Click ShutOff Dist from the menu manager, type 1 as the silhouette edges offset,
and press ENTER.
26. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Plane.
27. Select datum plane SHUTOFF from the model tree.
28. Click Done/Return.
29. Click Preview.

30. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
31. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
32. Click Boundary > Select > One By One from the menu manager.
33. Query-select the entire SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch and click Done from the
menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
34. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click Draft Angle.
 Type 4 as the value and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

Task 4. Specify a clip plane.

35. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition .

36. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click Clip Plane.
37. Select datum plane CLIP_PLANE in the model tree.
38. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
39. Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9

40. In the model tree, right-click SHADOW-SURF.PRT and select Unhide .

41. Spin the model and observe the shadow surface from the underside.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10

This completes the procedure.

Creating Parting Surfaces using Shadow

Surfaces
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Mouse_Part-Surf_Shadow folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MOUSE_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Create parting surfaces using the Shadow Surface feature.
 Create parting surfaces by using basic surface creation tools.
 Modify surfaces by using various editing tools.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Scenario
In this exercise, you use manual surface creation techniques to create parting
surfaces in the mouse mold model.

Task 1. Create the first parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Orient to the 3D view orientation.

3. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
4. Rename the parting surface feature by doing the following:
 Click in the graphics window.
 Right-click and select Properties.
 Type INSERT as the Name of the parting surface and press ENTER.
5. Click the Surfacing group drop-down menu and select Shadow Surface.
 In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click Direction.
 As oriented, select the top workpiece surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. Click Okay from the menu manager.
7. Click Preview from the Shadow Surface dialog box.

8. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
9. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
10. In the menu manager, click Boundary > Select > One By One.
11. Zoom in on the reference model, press CTRL, and select the four inner edges.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
12. Click Done from the menu manager.
13. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Plane.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

14. Click Plane from the Datum group.

15. As oriented, select the top workpiece surface.
16. Drag the datum plane down and edit the Translation value to 25.4.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
17. Click OK from the Datum Plane dialog box.
18. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
19. Click OK from the Shadow Surface dialog box.
20. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
21. Click in the graphics window to de-select all features.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

Task 2. Create an extruded surface.

22. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

23. Query-select the bottom side of the workpiece as the Sketch Plane.

24. Click References and select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as an additional

reference.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

25. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

26. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the
Sketching group and sketch a rectangle symmetric about both references.

27. Click One-by-One and edit the horizontal dimension to 190.5 and the
vertical dimension to 254.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 7

28. Click OK .
29. Right-click the depth handle and select To Selected.
30. Select the flat surface as the depth reference.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8

31. Click Complete Feature .

32. Orient to the 3D view orientation to inspect the surface you have created.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 9
33. Orient to the Standard Orientation when finished.

Task 3. Merge the two surfaces.

34. Select the shadow surface quilt.

Enlarge Image
Figure 10
35. Press CTRL and query-select the extruded surface quilt.

36. Click Merge from the Editing group.

37. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
 Verify that the Intersect option is selected as the merge type.

38. In the dashboard, click Change First Quilt Side as necessary until the
correct final geometry displays, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 11

39. Click Complete Feature .

40. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 12

Task 4. Create the second parting surface.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

41. Click Parting Surface .

42. Rename the parting surface feature by doing the following:

 Click Properties from the Controls group.

 Type MAIN as the Name of the parting surface and press ENTER.
43. Click the Surfacing group drop-down menu and select Shadow Surface.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 13

44. Click OK .

45. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

46. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, click Select All , and click
OK to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Creating a Parting Surface Manually

Sometimes the silhouette curve and skirt surface features do not provide you the
desired parting surface shape.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Mold Model Before Manual Parting Surfaces Created

You can create the parting surface manually in these types of circumstances. You
may also use a combination of a skirt surface and manual parting surface for a
mold model. The skirt surface can be used for the parting surface in the locations
where the proper geometry has been created, and a manual parting surface can
be created in areas where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape.

To create a parting surface manually, you can click Parting Surface from
the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group and then use the various basic and
advanced surface creation techniques. Each of the surfaces created belongs to
the parting surface feature. You can also use the various editing and
manipulation tools on the surfaces.
After all surfaces have been created for a given loop area in the mold model, you

must use Merge to merge the surfaces together before completing the
parting surface feature.
In Figure 2, a total of three surfaces were created to close the loop and create the
parting surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Manual Parting Surface Created

Two surfaces are fill surfaces, and the third surface is an extruded surface. Once
all three surfaces were created they were merged together. At this point the
silhouette curve could be used to create the outer loop of the parting surface and
to fill the hole shutoff in the boss.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Skirt Surface Used to Generate Other Parting Surface

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces

To handle a saddle shutoff within the part, you must create the surfaces which
represent the shutoff faces. A saddle shutoff is a bit more challenging than the
parting line surface or a face shutoff because you generally need several
surfaces to form the required shape. Typically, you create the saddle surface and
then create the face surfaces.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Saddle Surface Created

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Face Surfaces Created

You can extrude or revolve the surfaces, or use more advanced geometry
creation methods like blended surfaces, depending on the desired geometry. You
can even copy existing surfaces and paste them. You can then manipulate these
surfaces by extending, trimming, and offsetting them if needed.
Once the saddle surface and face surfaces have been created, you must merge
the surfaces together to form the required shape.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Final Saddle Shutoff

To create surfaces for saddle shutoffs, it is beneficial to use existing geometry edges and surfaces as
references for your surfaces. However, remember that if you use existing geometry, your surfaces
become dependent on that geometry.

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Surface_Saddle-ShutOff folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SADDLE-SHUTOFF.ASM.

Task 1. Complete the saddle shutoff surface in the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select SADDLE-SHUTOFF_WRK.PRT.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

6. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

7. Click Properties from the Controls group.

 Edit the Name to SADDLE_SHUTOFF and press ENTER.

8. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

9. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
10. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch Plane.
11. In the Sketch dialog box, select Top as the Orientation and click Sketch.

12. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

13. Select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

15. Click Project from the Sketching group, select the seven edges, and click
Close from the Type dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

16. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

17. Click OK .
18. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

19. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric .

 Edit the depth to 100 and click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge
Image
Figure 4
20. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as the Sketch Plane.

21. Click Extrude .

22. Click Sketch View .

23. Click Hidden Line .

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

24. Click References from the Setup group and select the right, angled
silhouette surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
25. Click Close from the References dialog box.

26. Click Line Chain and sketch the line on the angled reference, starting at the
horizontal reference and stopping above the saddle surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

27. Click Shading .

28. Click OK .
29. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

30. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric .

 Edit the depth to 100 and click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
31. Select the quilt you just extruded.

32. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Mirror .

33. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT and click Complete Feature from the
dashboard.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 9

34. Disable Plane Display .

35. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.
36. Select the saddle quilt, press CTRL, and select the right face quilt.

37. Click Merge from the Editing group.

38. In the dashboard, click Change First Quilt Side and Change Second Quilt

Side as necessary until you get the correct final geometry.

 Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
39. Select the saddle quilt, press CTRL, and select the left face quilt.

40. Click Merge .

41. In the dashboard, click Change First Quilt Side and Change Second Quilt

Side as necessary until you get the correct final geometry.

 Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

42. Click OK from the Controls group.

43. Spin the model and inspect the saddle surface

Enlarge Image
Figure 12

This completes the procedure.

Creating Fill Surfaces

During parting surface creation, you can fill a sketch to create a planar surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Creating a Fill Surface

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Creating a Second Filled Surface

You can either select the sketch first and then start the Fill tool, or start the Fill
tool and then select the sketch. If you select the sketch first and then start the Fill
tool, the feature is automatically completed.
The following are important points about the sketches used by the Fill tool:
 The sketch must be a sketched curve, and it can be either an internal or external
sketch.
 The sketch must be closed. However, it can contain multiple loops.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 The sketch can be any shape. That is, it can contain either tangent or non-
tangent entities.
 The sketch may reference other geometry.
Because you are using the Fill tool to fill gaps in the reference model during
parting surface creation, you will often be referencing other geometry, whether
edges or surfaces of the reference model or workpiece, or edges of other parting
surfaces. Usually the resulting planar surface is part of a larger parting surface,
and thus the filled surface must be merged with the other portions of the parting
surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Final Parting Surface Created

Creating Fill Surfaces

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Surface_Fill folder and click OK
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click File > Open and double-click FILL-SURFACE.ASM.

Task 1. Create a filled surface for a parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Notice that there is no parting surface created for the square hole to the left.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

3. In the model tree, right-click Skirt Surface id 518 and select Hide .

4. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

5. Click Fill from the Surfacing group.

6. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
7. Zoom in and select the surface shown as the Sketch Plane.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
8. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as the Reference and click Sketch.

9. Click References from the Setup group and select the five surfaces as
references.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
10. Click Close from the References dialog box.

11. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

12. Click Line Chain and sketch the eight lines.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

13. Click OK .

14. Click Complete Feature .

Task 2. Create a second filled surface for a parting surface.

15. Press ALT and select the surface shown as the Sketch Plane.

16. Click Fill .

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

17. Click Project from the Sketching group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

18. Select the three edges of the other filled surface, the two straight edges of the
hole, and the two curved edges of the hole.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

19. Click OK and click Complete Feature .

20. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

Task 3. Create an extrude feature and merge the three surfaces

together.

21. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

22. Select the second created fill surface.

23. Click Project and select the three edges of the second created fill surface.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

24. Click OK .

25. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the first filled surface.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

26. Click Complete Feature .

27. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.

28. Select the top flat quilt, press CTRL, and select the extruded quilt.

29. Click Merge from the Editing group.

30. Press CTRL and select the smaller filled surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 9

31. Click Complete Feature .

32. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image
Figure 10

This completes the procedure.

Extending Curves
You can select curves or edge chains on the reference model to extend and
create a parting surface. You must specify the reference model so that the
system can identify which curves are available for selection. You must also
specify the boundary reference (usually the workpiece) to instruct the system on
how far to extend the specified curves.
The following extension directions are available for the selected curves:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Normal to the Pull Direction – All specified curves are extended normal to the pull
direction.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Extending Curves Normal to Pull Direction
There are two additional options you can select from when curves extend normal
to the pull direction:
o Perpendicular to reference model – The specified curves extend normal to the
pull direction and perpendicular to the adjacent reference model surfaces.
o Perpendicular to boundary – The specified curves extend normal to the pull
direction and perpendicular to the surfaces of the defined boundary reference
model (usually the workpiece).
 Parallel to the Pull Direction – All specified curves are extended parallel to the
pull direction.
 Tangent to the Model – All specified curves are extended tangent to the adjacent
reference model surfaces.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2 – Extending Curves Tangent to the Model

 Under Defined Direction – All specified curves extend normal to the direction
reference you specify.
Optionally, you can enable the system to create surface transitions across gaps
in the extended edges.
You can also define multiple extensions for a given operation. You can define
one set of edges to be extended in a specific direction and define a different set
of edges to be extended in a different direction.

Shut Off Types

When extending edges, you can choose to add a shut off if desired within the
Shut Off tab of the dashboard. The following shut off types are available:
 Boundary – The default type, the Boundary type extends the edges in the
specified direction, out to the defined boundary reference model.
 Distance – Enables you to specify a distance outward that the curves extend from
the reference model before they stop and extend in the pull direction. With the
Distance shut off type, you can also specify a Shut Off Plane. Rather than
extending the curves in the pull direction out to the workpiece boundary, the
curves instead stop at the defined shut off plane reference.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Adding a Distance Shut Off
Additionally, you can draft the surfaces extended in the pull direction by specifying
a draft angle.
 To a Reference – Enables you to specify a sketch that the curves extend from the
reference model before they stop and extend in the pull direction. With the To a
Reference type, you can also specify a Shut Off Plane. Rather than extending the
curves in the pull direction out to the workpiece boundary, the curves instead stop
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

at the defined shut off plane reference. Additionally, you can draft the surfaces
extended in the pull direction by specifying a draft angle.

Extending Curves
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Surface_Extend-Curve folder and
click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click EXTEND-CURVE.ASM.

Task 1. Extend selected reference model curves.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. From the model tree, select EXTEND-CURVE_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

6. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

7. Click Extend Curve from the Surfacing group.

8. Press CTRL and select the five outer bottom edges.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
9. In the dashboard, select the References tab.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
10. Notice that the reference model is automatically defined, as is the boundary
reference.
11. In the dashboard, notice that the Direction is Normal to the Pull Direction.
 The five selected curves extend normal to the pull direction until they intersect the boundary.

12. Select Parallel to the Pull Direction from the Direction drop-down list.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
 The five selected curves extend parallel to the pull direction until they intersect the boundary.

13. Select Tangent to the Model from the Direction drop-down list.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
 The five selected curves extend tangent to the model until they intersect the boundary.

14. Select Normal to the Pull Direction.

15. Press CTRL and select the top outer edge of the notch.
16. Press CTRL and select the left and right outer notch edges.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
17. Notice that the edges extend in the wrong directions.
18. In the dashboard, select the Extensions tab.
 Select Perpendicular to boundary as the Extension.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
19. Notice that all selected references extend out to the workpiece boundary,
perpendicular to the workpiece surfaces.
20. In the dashboard, select the Create Transitions check box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
21. Notice that the gaps between the extended edges are automatically filled with
transition surfaces.
22. Select Perpendicular to reference model as the Extension.
23. In the Extensions tab, scroll the Chain collector to the bottom.
24. Select the last reference, right-click, and select Remove.
25. Select the last reference, right-click, and select Remove.

Task 2. Add a new extend direction.

26. In the Extensions tab, click *New Extension.
27. Press CTRL and select the two vertical outer edges of the notch.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
28. Select User Defined Direction from the Direction drop-down list.
29. Select the right, vertical workpiece surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10

30. Click Complete Feature .

31. Click OK from the Controls group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

Task 3. Experiment with the various extension shutoff options.

32. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Unhide .

33. Right-click Extend Curve 1 and select Edit Definition .

34. In the dashboard, select the Shut Off tab.
35. Notice that the currently defined shut off Type is Boundary.
36. Select Distance from the Type drop-down list.
37. Edit the Distance value to 10.
38. Select datum plane SHUTOFF as the Shut Off Plane reference.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

39. Edit the Draft Angle value to 3.

Enlarge Image
Figure 12
40. Edit the Draft Angle value back to 0.
41. Select To a Reference from the Type drop-down list.
42. Query-select the entire Sketch 1 sketch.

Enlarge Image

Figure 13
43. Right-click and select Shut Off Plane to activate the collector.
44. Select the bottom workpiece surface.

45. Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 14

This completes the procedure.

Filling Loops
You must fill any closed loops in the reference model with a surface that acts as

the parting surface for the given loop. You can use the Fill Loops tool to
manually specify the reference chain that forms the loop to be filled.
The following types of fill loop surfaces can be created:
 Surface – The system fills in the specified loop with a surface.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1 – Surface Loop Type

Depending on the surrounding contours, the resulting surface may not suffice for
a parting surface.
 Fit a mid-plane – The system creates a planar surface at the midpoint of the
selected loop references. The surface is created parallel to the surface or datum
plane you specify.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Fit a Mid-Plane Loop Type
The shape of this surface is based on the loop shape. You can also specify an
offset from the references.
 Fit a mid-plane automatically – The system creates a planar surface at the
midpoint of the selected loop references, normal to the pull direction.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Fit a Mid-Plane Automatically Loop Type
You can specify an offset from the references.
 Fit a mid-surface – The system creates a planar surface at the midpoint of the
selected loop references. The surface is created through the selected surface.
The selected surface does not need to be planar. You can specify an offset from
the references.
 Extend to plane – The system extends the selected loop reference edges up to
the selected planar surface and caps the end.
 Extend to surface – The system extends the selected loop reference edges up to
the selected surface and caps the end. The capped end shape takes on that of
the selected surface, which does not need to be planar.

Filling Loops
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Surface_Fill-Loops folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click LOOPS.ASM.

Task 1. Experiment with the different options available for filling

loops.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. From the model tree, select LOOPS_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

6. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

7. Click Fill Loops from the Surfacing group.

8. Zoom in to the top of the model.
9. Select the edge shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
10. Press SHIFT and select the other three tangent edges.
11. In the dashboard, notice that the Type is Surface.
12. Notice the resulting preview surface.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
13. In the dashboard, edit the Type to Fit a mid-plane.
14. Select datum plane EXTEND.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
15. In the dashboard, select the Closures tab.
 Edit the Offset to 8.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
16. Select Fit a mid-plane automatically from the Type drop-down list.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
17. Notice that the resulting plane is normal to the pull direction.
18. Select Fit a mid-surface from the Type drop-down list.
19. Select the top surface of the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
20. Select Extend to plane from the Type drop-down list.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
21. Select the bottom surface of the reference model as the new plane reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
22. Select Extend to surface from the Type drop-down list.

23. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

24. Click OK from the Controls group.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10

This completes the procedure.

Creating Shut Offs

You must fill any loops in the reference model with a surface that acts as the

parting surface for the given loop. You can use the Shut Off to fill both open
and closed holes in the reference model.
To create the shut off, you must specify the following:

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Creating a Shut Off

 Reference Surfaces – Specifies the surfaces that define the perimeter of the
loops you wish to close.
 Shut Off Loops – Enables you to select the edges of the specified reference
surfaces that define the desired loop.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Closing All Internal Loops

You can select the Close all internal loops check box to automatically fill all
closed holes within the selected reference surfaces.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Closing All Internal Loops

When this option is selected, it is not necessary to select the shut off loop edges.
If desired, you can also exclude individual holes from the shut off operation.

Capping Open Loops

The Shut Off tool enables you to also fill open loops in the reference model by
specifying a cap surface. The cap surface closes the open loop so that it can be
filled with the parting surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Capping an Open Loop
The specified cap surface(s) must pass through the ends of the open loop. If a
surface is not available, you can create a datum plane to define the cap surface.

Creating Shut Offs

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Parting-Surface_Shut-Off folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHUT-OFF.ASM.

Task 1. Create shut offs by closing all internal loops.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.

3. Click Shut Off from the Surfacing group.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
4. In the dashboard, select the Close all internal loops check box.
5. Select the surface shown.
6. Notice that all three internal loops within the surface are closed.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
7. Press CTRL and select the rounded surface.
8. Again, notice that all internal loops within the surface are closed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
9. In the dashboard, select the References tab.
 Click in the Exclude Loops collector to activate it.
 Select an edge on the leftmost hole, press SHIFT, and select the three adjacent
edges.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

10. Click Complete Feature .

11. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

12. Notice that the one hole has been excluded.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

13. Click Shut Off .

14. Select the Close all internal loops check box.
15. Zoom in on the top, leftmost hole.
16. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
17. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces on each of the four other similar holes.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

18. Click Complete Feature and click in the background to de-select all
geometry.
19. Orient to the 3D2 view orientation.

20. Click Shut Off .

21. Select the Close all internal loops check box.
22. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 8

23. Click Complete Feature .

24. Click OK from the Controls group.

Task 2. Create shut offs by specifying loops.

25. Orient to the 3D3 view orientation.

26. Click Parting Surface and click Shut Off .

27. Press CTRL and select the five surfaces.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
28. Right-click and select Shut Off Loops.
29. Select an edge, press SHIFT, and select the nine adjacent edges to create the
loop.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
30. Right-click and select Reference Surfaces.
31. Press CTRL and select the same five surfaces on the second tab location,
spinning the model as necessary.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 11
32. Right-click and select Shut Off Loops.
33. Press CTRL and select an edge.
34. Press SHIFT and select the nine adjacent edges to create the second loop.

Enlarge Image
Figure 12
35. Repeat the process to create the shut off for the third tab.

36. Click Complete Feature and click OK .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 13

Task 3. Create a shut off by capping the open loops.

37. Orient to the 3D4 view orientation.

38. Click Parting Surface and click Shut Off .

39. Select the surface shown as the reference surface.

Enlarge Image
Figure 14
40. Right-click and select Shut Off Loops.
41. Select an edge, press SHIFT, and select the five adjacent edges.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 15
42. Right-click and select Cap Surfaces.

43. In the dashboard, click Datum and select Plane .

44. Select the surface as the Offset reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 16
45. Click OK from the Datum Plane dialog box.

46. In the dashboard, click Resume Feature .

47. Notice that the parting surface is shut off at the newly created datum plane.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 17
48. Right-click and select Shut Off Loops.
49. Press CTRL and select an edge on the other loop.
50. Press SHIFT and select the same five adjacent edges to complete the second
loop.

51. Click Complete Feature and click OK .

Enlarge Image

Figure 18

This completes the procedure.

Creating Parting Surfaces Manually

Before you begin
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Mouse_Parting-Surface folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MOUSE_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Create parting surfaces by extending curves.
 Create parting surfaces using the Fill feature.
 Create parting surfaces using basic surface creation tools.
 Modify surfaces using various editing tools.

Scenario
In this exercise, you use manual surface creation techniques to create parting
surfaces in the mouse mold model.

Task 1. Create the first parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
3. Rename the parting surface feature by doing the following:

 Click Properties from the Controls group.

 Type MAIN as the Name of the parting surface and press ENTER.
4. Copy the top three rounded surfaces of the mouse mold by doing the following:
 Right-click to query and select the MOUSE_REF.PRT model in the graphics
window.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
5. Select the top surface, press CTRL, and query-select the two remaining surfaces,
as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
6. Press CTRL+C and press CTRL+V.

7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Click in the graphics window to de-select all features.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

9. Extend the edges of the reference model by doing the following:

 Click Extend Curve from the Surfacing group.

 Press CTRL and select the four edges of the reference model.
 Notice the angled edges between the four surfaces in the preview.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
10. In the dashboard, select the References tab.
11. Notice that the Boundary Reference is the workpiece.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
12. In the dashboard, select the Extensions tab.
13. Select Perpendicular to boundary as the extension type.
14. Notice that the edges of the four surface extensions are now perpendicular to the
workpiece (boundary reference) surfaces.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
15. In the dashboard, select the Create Transitions check box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6

16. Click Complete Feature .

17. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

18. In the model tree, right-click MOUSE_WP.PRT and select Hide .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

19. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style
types drop-down menu.
20. Notice that the two surfaces are not joined to each other.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
21. Select the rounded quilt from the three copied surfaces.
22. Press CTRL and select the quilt created from the extended curves.

23. Click Merge from the Editing group.

24. Click Complete Feature .

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

25. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

26. Click OK from the Controls group.

Task 2. Create the second parting surface.

27. In the model tree, select Copy 1, right-click, and select Hide .
28. Orient to the 3D view orientation.

29. Click Parting Surface .

30. Rename the parting surface feature by doing the following:
 Click in the graphics window.
 Right-click and select Properties.
 Type INSERT as the Name of the parting surface and press ENTER.
31. Copy the three rounded surfaces on the underside of the mouse mold by doing
the following:
 Select the MOUSE_REF.PRT model in the graphics window.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
32. Select the top surface, press CTRL, and query-select the two remaining surfaces,
as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
33. Press CTRL+C and press CTRL+V.

34. Click Complete Feature .

35. Click in the graphics window to de-select all features.

36. Extend the edges of the reference model by doing the following:

 Click Extend Curve .

 Press CTRL and select the four inner edges of the reference model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 11
37. In the dashboard, select Parallel to the Pull Direction from the Direction drop-
down list.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 12

38. Click Complete Feature .

39. Select the rounded quilt from the three copied surfaces.
40. Press CTRL and select the quilt created from the extended curves.

41. Click Merge from the Editing group.

42. Click Complete Feature .

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 13

43. Right-click MOUSE_WP.PRT and select Unhide .

44. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

45. Click Fill from the Surfacing group.

46. Click Datum from the dashboard and click Plane .

47. As oriented, select the top workpiece surface.
48. Drag the datum plane down and edit the Translation value to 25.4.

Enlarge Image
Figure 14
49. Click OK.

50. Click Resume Feature from the dashboard.

51. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

52. Click Project from the Sketching group.

53. Select all four top edges of the workpiece.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 15

54. Click OK .

Enlarge Image
Figure 16

55. Click Complete Feature

56. In the model tree, press CTRL and select Merge 2 and Fill 1.

57. Click Merge .

58. Click Complete Feature .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 17

Task 3. Create an extruded surface.

59. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

60. As oriented, select the top workpiece surface as the sketching plane.

Enlarge Image

Figure 18

61. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the
Sketching group.
62. Sketch the rectangle so that its center is located on the coordinate system
reference.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

63. Click One-by-One from the Operations group.

64. Edit the rectangle width to 190.5 and the rectangle height to 254.

Enlarge Image

Figure 19

65. Click OK .
66. Right-click the depth handle and select To Selected.
67. Select the fill surface as the depth reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 20

68. Click Complete Feature .

69. Click in the graphics window to de-select all features.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

70. In the model tree, press CTRL and select Merge 3 and Extrude 1.

71. Click Merge .

72. Click Complete Feature .

Enlarge Image

Figure 21

73. Click OK from the Controls group.

74. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 22

75. In the model tree, right-click Copy 1 and select Unhide .

Enlarge Image

Figure 23

76. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

77. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, click Select All , and click
OK to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Splitting the Workpiece

You can split or divide the workpiece with the All Wrkpcs split option by using a
parting surface or a mold volume. When the workpiece split is performed, Creo
Parametric calculates the total volume of the workpiece and creates a mold
volume from it. The system then subtracts, or trims, the reference model
geometry and any mold features such as gates, runners, and sprues from the
workpiece volume and creates a Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree (this
Refpart Cutout feature displays in the model tree differently than a reference part
cutout operation that is performed on a mold volume).
The remaining mold volume is then split at the specified parting surface or mold
volume.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Mold Model and Parting Surface
The system trims the amount of workpiece volume to one side of the parting
surface or mold volume and turns that volume into its own mold volume. If
applicable, the system also trims the amount of workpiece volume on the other side
of the parting surface or mold volume and turns that volume into its own mold
volume. A simple mold model containing only a core and cavity is a typical example.
One of the mold volumes becomes the core, and the other the cavity.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Split Mold Model Core Volume

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Split Mold Model Cavity Volume

One Volume or Two?

For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold volumes
are to be created by specifying one of the following options :
 Two Volumes — Splits the workpiece into two mold volumes.
 One Volume — Splits the workpiece into a single mold volume, discarding the
other portion. You must specify which portion you want included in the mold
volume. You can do this using the Island List. The Island List enables you to
select which portion to include in the new volume. When you cursor over an
island in the list, the corresponding geometry highlights blue in the graphics
window.
Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to name
each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading it. The system
hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold volume with the name
you specify.

Workpiece Splitting Guidelines

Consider the following guidelines when splitting the workpiece:

 A split operation in a mold model using the All Wrkpcs option is typically only
performed one time.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Splitting a workpiece does not modify its geometry. Whenever a workpiece is

split, the system copies the volume occupied by the workpiece and creates a
mold volume from it.
 If you split a workpiece by a parting surface, the system modifies the existing
volume. That is, a volume is split and either one or two volumes are created in
place of the original volume.
 Splitting the workpiece with parting surfaces ensures that these solid mold
components add up to the desired volume, with no extra or missing pieces.
 If you split the workpiece by a parting surface, the parting surface must
completely intersect the workpiece.
 If you split a workpiece by another volume, the original volumes are not modified.
Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For example, if you use
the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold volume A using mold
volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes after the split: original
volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of the new mold volumes C or
D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B.
As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold
volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you end up
with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and new volume C.
New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B. Using the One Volume
option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the number of mold volume features
down in the model tree.
 Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you determine
which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later on. For example,
if the mold volume will become the core mold component, name it “core_vol”.

Splitting the Workpiece

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Split-Workpiece folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SPLIT-WORKPIECE.ASM.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 1. Split the mold model workpiece into volumes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the SPLIT-WORKPIECE_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the skirt parting surface.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

7. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager.
9. Notice that the workpiece has been filled with a mold volume.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
10. Select the parting surface from the graphics window.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
11. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
12. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
13. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Notice that the volume will be the core of the mold.
 Type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
14. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
15. Orient to the 3D view orientation and notice that this volume will be the cavity of
the mold.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
16. In the Properties dialog box, type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER.
17. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
18. In the model tree, notice the Refpart Cutout feature.
19. Also notice the two mold volumes that were created, and their names.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

This completes the procedure.

Splitting Mold Volumes

You can split an existing mold volume in a mold model using the Mold Volume
split option. This option is only available if the workpiece has already been split,
or if you have sketched a mold volume slider, insert, or lifter, for example. Unlike
the All Wrkpces option, when a mold volume is split, the system does not create
a reference part cutout in the model tree.
When you specify the Mold Volume option, the system uses the Search Tool to
perform a search for all quilts (mold volumes) in the mold model. You must
specify the desired quilt (mold volume) to be split from the list of results found.
You should not modify the parameters of the Search Tool to obtain different
results.
A mold model containing sliders, inserts, or lifters needs to undergo multiple split
operations because multiple mold components will be created from the mold
model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Mold Model and Slider Volumes

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

One Volume or Two?

For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold volumes
are to be created by specifying one of the following options:
 Two Volumes — Splits the mold volume into two mold volumes.
 One Volume — Splits the mold volume into a single mold volume, “discarding”
the other portion. You must specify which portion you want included in the mold
volume. This is done using the Island List. The Island List enables you to select
which portion is to be included in the new volume. When you hover over an island
in the list, the corresponding geometry highlights blue in the graphics window.
Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to name
each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading it. The system
hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold volume with the name
you specify.

Creating Intermediate Mold Volumes

Depending on the mold model and its complexity, not every mold volume created
will be used to create a final solid mold component. It may be necessary to create
“intermediate”, or temporary mold volumes during splitting operations. For
example, if you split the workpiece into the core and cavity volumes, but the core
volume must further be split to remove a slider volume, you create an
intermediate core volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Core Volume Before it is Split for Slider Volumes

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Core Volume After Splits for Slider Volumes

Mold Volume Splitting Guidelines

Consider the following guidelines when splitting mold volumes:

 When you split a volume by a parting surface, the volume is split at the parting
surface and either one or two volumes are created in place of the original volume.
 When you split a volume by another volume, the original volumes are not
modified. Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For example, if
you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold volume A using
mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes after the split: original
volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of the new mold volumes C or
D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B.
As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold
volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you end up
with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and new volume C.
New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B. Using the One Volume
option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the number of mold volume features
down in the model tree.
 When you split the mold volume by a parting surface, the parting surface must
completely intersect the mold volume.
 Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you determine
which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later on. For example,
if a mold volume is used as an intermediate mold volume, name it
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

“temp_mold_vol1”, or something similar so you know later on that it will not be

used to create a solid mold component.

Splitting Mold Volumes

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Split-Volumes folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SPLIT-VOLUMES.ASM.

Task 1. Split the workpiece and mold volumes of a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the SPLIT-VOLUMES_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the skirt parting surface and the two slider mold volumes in the graphics
window and model tree.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

7. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager.
9. Notice that the workpiece has been filled with a mold volume.
10. Select the parting surface from the graphics window and click OK from the Select
dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
11. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
12. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

13. Click Wireframe from the In Graphics toolbar.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
14. Notice that the volume will be the core of the mold, but that it has not taken the
slider volumes into account.
15. In the Properties dialog box type TEMP-CORE_VOL1 and press ENTER.
16. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
17. Spin the model and notice that this volume will be the cavity of the mold.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
18. In the Properties dialog box, type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER.
19. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

20. In the model tree, right-click SPLIT ID 7286 [CAVITY_VOL-MOLD VOLUME] and

select Hide .

21. Click Volume Split and click One Volume > Mold Volume > Done from the
menu manager.
22. In the Search Tool dialog box, select the TEMP-CORE_VOL1 quilt and click Add
Item .
 Click Close.
23. Query-select the front slider volume and click OK from the Select dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
24. In the menu manager, select the Island 1 check box and click Done Sel.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 6
25. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
26. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and notice the slider volume has been
trimmed from the temporary core volume.
 Type TEMP-CORE_VOL2 and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

27. Click Volume Split and click One Volume > Mold Volume > Done.
28. In the Search Tool dialog box, select the TEMP-CORE_VOL2 quilt and click Add
Item .
 Click Close.
29. Query-select the rear slider volume and click OK from the Select dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

30. In the menu manager, select the Island 1 check box and click Done Sel.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
31. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
32. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and notice that the slider volume has
been trimmed from the final core volume.
 Type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting

Surfaces
You can use multiple parting surfaces to split volumes in two different ways:
 You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or mold volume into
multiple mold volumes. You can use one parting surface for one split operation,
and specify a different parting surface for a second split operation.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Selecting Multiple Parting Surfaces
Of course you must also specify the workpiece or mold volume to split and the
names of the first and, if applicable, second volumes.
 Sometimes the shape of the reference model and the parting surfaces created
require that you specify more than one parting surface during a single split
operation. In these circumstances, you can press CTRL in order to select multiple
parting surfaces. You can also select multiple mold volumes to split a workpiece
or mold volume in a split operation.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Model Tree Containing Two Parting Surfaces

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Viewing Multiple Parting Surfaces

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting

Surfaces
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Split-Volumes_Multiple folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MULT-SURF1.ASM.

Task 1. Split a volume using multiple parting surfaces in one split.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the MULT-SURF1_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that there are two parting surfaces, SKIRT_PART-SURF and
MANUAL_PART-SURF.

7. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

9. Press CTRL, select the two parting surfaces, and click OK from the Select dialog
box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
10. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
11. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CORE_VOL, and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
12. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 2. Split volumes with multiple parting surfaces in two split

operations.

13. Click Open and double-click MULT-SURF2.ASM.

14. Select the MULT-SURF2_WRK.PRT.
15. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
16. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
17. Select the Mold tab.
18. Notice the two parting surfaces MAIN_PART_SURF and SIDE_PART_SURF.

19. Click Volume Split .

20. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager.
21. Select the SIDE_PART_SURF and click OK from the Select dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
22. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
23. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL, and press
ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
24. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type SLIDER_VOL, and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

25. Click Volume Split and click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done.
26. In the Search Tool dialog box, select TEMP-MOLD_VOL, click Add Item , and
click Close.
27. Query-select the MAIN_PART_SURF and click OK from the Select dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

28. Click OK from the Split dialog box.

29. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CORE_VOL, and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
30. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9

This completes the procedure.

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items

You can blank and unblank mold items at any time during your work in Mold
mode. Blank and unblank functionality is similar to hide and unhide functionality.
However, unlike the hide-unhide functionality, you do not have to save the blank-
unblank status. It is retained for you automatically. Additionally, when a mold item
is comprised of multiple features, such as a manually created parting surface,
you can blank or unblank the entire parting surface in one operation, rather than
having to hide or unhide individual features.
The following items can be blanked and unblanked:
 Parting surface — Enables you to blank/unblank any parting surface in the
mold model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Volume — Enables you to blank/unblank any mold volume, such as sliders,

cores, and cavities.
 Component — Enables you to blank/unblank the reference model, workpiece,
or any other mold component.
You can blank and unblank mold items using the following methods:

 Click Mold Display , in the View tab, to access the Blank and Unblank
dialog box. You can also press CTRL+B to access the dialog box. The Filter Tree
in the dialog box enables you to see only the mold item types you want to blank
or unblank. You can filter by parting surfaces, volumes, or components. If you
click Parting surface , for example, you will see only the parting surfaces
available for selection in the dialog box. When a Component filter option is
activated, a series of check boxes becomes available, enabling you to further
filter the components displayed in the Blank-Unblank dialog box. The following
component items can further be filtered:
o Workpiece
o Ref Model
o Mold Component
o Mold Base Comp
o Gen Assembly
o Molding

The Blank and Unblank dialog box contains a Blank and Unblank tab. Items listed
in the Blank tab are those that are visible in the graphics window but available for
blanking. If you select an item and click Blank, the item is moved to the Unblank
tab of the dialog box. Similarly, the Unblank tab displays all items that are blanked
in the graphics window.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Blank and Unblank Dialog Boxes
 Select items from the model tree, then right-click and select Blank or Unblank. If
the mold item is comprised of numerous features, which can occur for a mold
volume or manually created parting surfaces, you must select the first feature to
blank or unblank the item. The Blank and Unblank menu selection is only
available for the first feature of the mold item.
 Select items from the graphics window, then right-click and select Blank or
Unblank.

Blanking and Unblanking Requirements

Consider the following blanking and unblanking criteria for items in a mold model:
 When splitting the workpiece or mold volume, the parting surface or mold volume
used to do the splitting must be unblanked.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 In order to split the workpiece, it must be unblanked. If the workpiece is blanked,

the All Wrkpcs split option is grayed out in the menu manager.

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Blank-Unblank folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click BLANK-UNBLANK.ASM.

Task 1. Blank and Unblank mold items using the Blank and Unblank
dialog box.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

3. Click Mold Display from the Visibility group.

4. Select the Mold tab.
 You can also press CTRL+B to access the Blank and Unblank dialog box.

5. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select Component as the Filter if
necessary.
 Press CTRL and select BLANK-UNBLANK_REF and BLANK-UNBLANK_WRK.
 Click Blank.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select Volume as the Filter.
 Select CAVITY_VOL and click Blank.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2
7. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select CORE_VOL and click Blank.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
8. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select Parting surface as the Filter.
 Select MAIN_PART_SURF and click Blank.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
9. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select the Unblank tab.
 Select Component as the Filter.
 Select BLANK-UNBLANK_REF and click Unblank.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

Task 2. Blank and Unblank mold items from the model tree and
graphics window.
10. In the model tree, right-click SLIDER_VOL and select Blank.

11. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar and de-select all geometry.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
12. In the graphics window select the side parting surface, right-click, and select
Blank.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

13. Click Repaint .

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
14. In the model tree, right-click CORE_VOL and select Unblank.

15. Click Repaint and de-select all geometry.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
16. In the model tree, right-click BLANK-UNBLANK_REF.PRT and select Blank.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Split Classification

When you split a volume, depending upon the shape of the workpiece, the shape
of the reference model, and the shape of the parting surface, the split may create
several individual closed volumes. When you create a split using the Two
Volumes option, each of these volumes must end up as part of one volume or the
other. Similarly, when you create a split using the One Volume option, each of
these volumes must end up as part of the new volume, or left to remain in the old
volume.
Each one of these individual closed volumes occupies an island of space within
the mold model. You must specify which islands of space should belong together,
or be included, in the resultant mold volume. The process of determining which
islands should be included in the resultant mold volume is called classifying.
Each of the islands displays in the menu manager Island List. When you hover
over a given island in the menu manager, its corresponding volume of space
highlights in blue in the graphics window, as shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Resultant Mold Volume

Each of the islands you select from the Island List are included together to comprise
the resultant mold volume. The islands that are not selected either end up in the
other mold volume (in the case of a Two Volumes split) or discarded (in the case
of a One Volume split).
A One Volume split always creates a situation where you must classify the
islands to be included in the resultant volume. The reason for this is that
regardless of whether you split by a parting surface or by another volume, you
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

must specify which side of the split you want to be included in the resultant
volume. You also must classify islands when you specify multiple parting
surfaces or mold volumes when splitting a volume.
Classifying islands in a mold model enables you to create simpler manual parting
surfaces. In Figure 1, a flat parting surface was used to create the slider mold
volume shown in Figure 3.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing Reference Part Geometry

This was done by classifying the islands properly, as shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Classifying Islands

Rather than creating a flat parting surface, you can create a parting surface which
completely conforms to the interior of all the cuts in the reference model. You can
then split the workpiece using this more complex parting surface and not have to
classify islands. The parting surface would look like this:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Analyzing Split Classification

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Split_Classification folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SPLIT-CLASSIFICATION.ASM.

Task 1. Classify islands to split mold volumes correctly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Select the SPLIT-CLASSIFICATION_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the three cuts in the side of the reference model.
7. In the model tree, right-click SLIDER_PARTING-SURF and select Unblank.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

8. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
9. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager.
10. Select the parting surface from the graphics window.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
11. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
12. In the menu manager, cursor over Island 1 and notice the corresponding space
the island occupies highlighted blue.
 Select the Island 1 check box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
13. In the menu manager, select the Island 3, Island 4, and Island 5 check boxes.
 Click Done Sel.
14. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
15. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and spin the model to inspect the mold
volume.
 Type SLIDER_VOL and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
16. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
17. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL, and press
ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

18. Click Volume Split .

19. Click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done.
20. In the Search Tool, select the TEMP-MOLD_VOL quilt and click Add Item .
 Click Close.
21. In the model tree, right-click CORE-CAVITY_PARTING-SURF and select
Unblank.
22. Query-select the parting surface and click OK from the Select dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
23. In the menu manager, select the Island 1, Island 3, and Island 4 check boxes,
and click Done Sel.
24. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
25. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and spin the model to inspect the mold
volume.
 Type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 7
26. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
27. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8

This completes the procedure.

Splitting the Shower Head Mold

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shower-Head_Split folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD.ASM.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Objectives
 Split the workpiece and split mold volumes.

Scenario
In this exercise you split the shower head mold model workpiece, and further split
the mold volumes to account for the slider and insert volumes.

Task 1. Split the workpiece.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
3. In the menu manager, click One Volume > All Wrkpcs > Done.
4. Select the plug volume from the graphics window and click OK from the Select
dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. In the menu manager, select the Island 1 check box and click Done Sel.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
6. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
7. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Type TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

8. Select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_WRK.PRT, right-click, and select Blank.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

Task 2. Split the remaining mold volumes.

9. Click Volume Split .

10. In the menu manager, click One Volume > Mold Volume > Done.
11. In the Search Tool, select TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 as the volume to split and click
Add Item .
 Click Close.
12. Press CTRL and query-select the SLIDER_LEFT_TAB and SLIDER_RIGHT_TAB
mold volumes.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
13. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
14. In the menu manager, select the Island 1 check box and click Done Sel.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 6
15. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
16. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Type TEMP-MOLD_VOL2 and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

17. Click Volume Split .

18. In the menu manager, click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done.
19. In the Search Tool, select TEMP-MOLD_VOL2 as the volume to split and click
Add Item .
 Click Close.
20. Query-select the skirt parting surface and click OK from the Select dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
21. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
22. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
23. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
24. Spin the model to inspect it.

Enlarge Image
Figure 10
25. In the Properties dialog box, type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

26. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

27. Press CTRL+B to access the Blank-Unblank dialog box.
28. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select the Blank tab.
 Select Parting surface as the Filter.
 Select PART_SURF_1 and click Blank.
 Select Volume as the Filter.
 Select TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 and click Blank.
 Select Component as the Filter.
 Select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_REF and click Blank.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image
Figure 11

29. Click No Hidden and inspect the mold model.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 12

30. Click Shading .

31. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

32. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Splitting the Mouse Mold

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Mouse_Split folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MOUSE_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Split the workpiece and split mold volumes.

Scenario
In this exercise, you split the mouse mold model workpiece, and further split the
mold volumes to account for the core insert volume.

Task 1. Split the workpiece.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume group.
3. In the menu manager, click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done.
4. Select the main parting surface from the graphics window and click OK from the
Select dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
6. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Type TEMP-MOUSE_CORE_VOL and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
7. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
8. Spin the model and inspect the mold volume.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
9. In the Properties dialog box, type MOUSE_CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER.
10. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
11. Select MOUSE_WP.PRT, right-click, and select Blank.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

Task 2. Split the core into mold volumes.

12. Click Volume Split .

13. In the menu manager, click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done.
14. In the Search Tool, select TEMP-MOUSE_CORE_VOL as the volume to split and
click Add Item .
 Click Close.
15. Query-select the insert parting surface.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 5
16. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
17. Click OK from the Split dialog box.
18. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Type MOUSE_CORE_INSERT_VOL and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
19. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade.
 Type MOUSE_CORE_OUTER_VOL and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

Task 3. Blank mold model items.

20. Press CTRL+B to access the Blank and Unblank dialog box.
21. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, select the Blank tab.
 Select Parting surface as the Filter.
 Select the MAIN parting surface and click Blank.
 Select Component as the Filter.
 Select MOUSE_REF and click Blank.
 Click OK.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 8

22. Click No Hidden and inspect the mold model.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9

23. Click Shading .

24. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

25. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes

Once the mold volumes are created and the workpiece and mold volumes are
split, you can create the final mold components. You can produce mold
components by filling the previously defined mold volumes with solid material.

This process, performed using the Cavity insert option, is called extracting.
Extracted parts can be core and cavity pieces as well as sliders, inserts, core
pins, and so on.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Extracted Core Mold Component
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Extracted Cavity Mold Component

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Extracted Slider Mold Component

The system does not automatically create mold components from every mold
volume found in the mold model. Recall that you may have created temporary
mold volumes during the split process to create your desired mold volumes.
Consequently, you must specify which mold volumes will be extracted into mold
components. When the mold components are extracted and created, the
corresponding mold volumes are automatically blanked from the graphics
window.
The extracted mold components are created in the mold model, and each
component contains an Extract feature that contains the solid geometry. The
extract feature cannot be redefined, but these components are fully functional
parts. You can retrieve them in Part mode, and add new features to them. To
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

save the extracted mold components, you must save the mold model before
erasing it from memory or exiting your current Creo Parametric session. By
default, the extracted mold components are named the same as the volumes
from which they were extracted.
Extracted mold components maintain a parent/child relationship with their mold
volumes. Therefore, the mold components automatically update when changes
are made to the mold volumes. While the mold volumes are assembly features in
the mold model, the mold components are assembly components in the mold
model.

Color-Coding of Extracted Mold Components

By default, the extracted mold components are created in the default Creo
Parametric gray color. However, the surfaces of the extracted mold components
may also display in three other potential colors:
 Reference model color – The mold components’ surfaces that touch the
reference model are color-coded the same as the reference model. In the figures,
the reference model color is red.
 Blue – Steel-to-steel contact between tooling component shutoffs.
 Orange – Steel-to-steel contact between slider mold component surfaces and
mold plates, cores, or cavities. It is important to note that only the slider mold
volumes created by calculating undercut boundaries, become orange when the
mold components are extracted. Sketched sliders and other components have
blue surfaces at their steel-to-steel contact points.

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Components_Extract-Volume folder and
click OK
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

3. Click File > Open and double-click EXTRACT-VOLUMES.ASM.

Task 1. Extract mold components from mold volumes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style
types drop-down menu and notice that the mold volumes are surfaces.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

3. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

4. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in
the Components group.

5. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select All .

 Press CTRL and click TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 to de-select it.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
6. Click OK from the Create Mold Component dialog box.
7. Notice the four new mold components created in the model tree.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

8. Select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu and notice
that the mold components are solid geometry.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

9. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

10. In the model tree, right-click CORE_VOL.PRT and select Open .

11. Notice the single Extract feature in the model tree.
12. Spin the model to inspect it and notice the surfaces that are blue.
13. Notice the surfaces that are orange.
14. Notice the surfaces that are reference model color.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

15. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to the mold model.

16. In the model tree, right-click CAVITY_VOL.PRT and select Open .

17. Again, notice the single Extract feature in the model tree.
18. Spin the model to inspect it and again notice the surfaces that are blue.
19. Notice the surfaces that are reference model color.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

20. Click Close to return to the mold model.

21. In the model tree, right-click SLIDER_VOL1.PRT and select Open .

22. Notice the orange surfaces.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7

23. Click Close to return to the mold model.

This completes the procedure.

Applying Start Models to Mold Components

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

You can apply an existing start model template to components when extracting
them from mold volumes in the mold model. This is done in the Advanced section
of the Create Mold Component dialog box. As a best practice, you should create
extracted mold components using a start model template. Using a start model
template when extracting mold components provides you with the following
benefits.
 Datums – Includes a set of default datum planes and a default coordinate system
 Layers
 Parameters
 View Orientations

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Renaming Mold Components and Applying Start Model

These are the same benefits that you gain from using a start model template
when creating new part models.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Renaming Mold Components

By default, extracted mold components are named the same as the mold volume
from which they are extracted. You can rename the mold component name in the
Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Extracted Mold Component Model Tree
This section displays the specified mold volumes that you extract. In one column
the mold volume name is displayed, and in another column the corresponding mold
component name is displayed. As a best practice you should rename the mold
components with names that are unique to the mold and to the type of component
being extracted. For example, a mold volume named cavity_vol should have its
corresponding mold component renamed to widget_cavity, or it should be renamed
according to your company's standards. Extracted mold components are not
volumes, so the “vol” suffix should be removed. Also, mold components are part
models. Therefore, each part model should be given a unique name.
You can only rename one mold component at a time. If more than one mold component is selected in
the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, the fields to rename mold components
become grayed out.

Applying Start Models to Mold Components

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so
already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click
File > Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session >
Erase Not Displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Components_Start-Model folder and click
OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click APPLY_START-MODEL.ASM.

Task 1. Rename mold components prior to extracting them.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in
the Components group.

3. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select All .

 Click Advanced to expand it.

 Notice that the mold volumes and corresponding mold component names are the
same.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
4. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, select mold
volume CAVITY_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to WIDGET_CAVITY and press ENTER.
 Select mold volume CORE_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to WIDGET_CORE and press ENTER.
 Select mold volume SLIDER_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to WIDGET_SLIDER and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

Task 2. Apply a start model to the mold components and extract

them.
5. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select

All .

 Click Copy From .

 In the Choose template dialog box, double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.

 Notice that the Copy From field displays the template model that is used.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
6. Click OK from the Create Mold Component dialog box.
7. Notice the three newly created mold components in the model tree.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

8. In the model tree, right-click WIDGET_SLIDER.PRT and select Open .

9. In the model tree, notice the datum features in addition to the Extract feature.

10. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Saved Orientations and select BACK.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

11. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree.

12. Notice the default layers.

Extracting Shower Head Mold Components

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shower-Head_Extract folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Extract solid mold components from mold volumes.

Scenario
In this exercise, you extract the solid mold components for the shower head
mold.

Task 1. Extract the mold components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in
the Components group.

3. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select All .

 Press CTRL and click TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 to de-select it.

 Click Advanced to expand it.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
4. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, select mold
volume CAVITY_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to CAVITY and press ENTER.
 Select mold volume CORE_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to CORE and press ENTER.
 Select mold volume PLUG_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to PLUG and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
5. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select

All .

 Click Copy From .

 In the Choose template dialog box, double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.

 Click OK.
6. Notice the five newly created mold components in the model tree.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

7. In the model tree, right-click CORE.PRT and select Open .

8. Notice the Extract feature in the model tree.
9. Spin the CORE.PRT and inspect it.
10. Notice the surfaces that are blue.
11. Notice the surfaces that are reference model color.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

12. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to the mold model.

13. In the model tree, right-click CAVITY.PRT and select Open .

14. Again, notice the Extract feature in the model tree.
15. Spin the CAVITY.PRT and inspect it.
16. Again, notice the surfaces that are blue.
17. Again, notice the surfaces that are reference model color.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

18. Click Close to return to the mold model.

19. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

20. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Extracting Mouse Mold Components

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Mouse_Extract folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MOUSE_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Extract solid mold components from mold volumes.

Scenario
In this exercise, you extract the solid mold components for the mouse mold.

Task 1. Extract the mold components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in
the Components group.

3. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select All .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Click Advanced to expand it.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1
4. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, select mold
volume MOUSE_CAVITY_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to MOUSE_CAVITY and press ENTER.
 Select mold volume MOUSE_CORE_INSERT_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to MOUSE_CORE_INSERT and press ENTER.
 Select mold volume MOUSE_CORE_OUTER_VOL.
 Edit the Mold Component Name to MOUSE_CORE_OUTER and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
5. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select

All .

 Click Copy From .

 In the Choose template dialog box, double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.

 Click OK.
6. Notice the three newly created mold components in the model tree.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
7. In the model tree, right-click MOUSE_CORE_INSERT.PRT and select Open

.
8. Notice the Extract feature in the model tree.
9. Notice the surfaces that are blue.
10. Notice the surfaces that are reference model color.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4

11. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to the mold model.

12. In the model tree, right-click MOUSE_CAVITY.PRT and select Open .

13. Again, notice the Extract feature in the model tree.
14. Spin the MOUSE_CAVITY.PRT and inspect it.
15. Again, notice the surfaces that are blue.
16. Again, notice the surfaces that are reference model color.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

17. Click Close to return to the mold model.

18. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

19. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Creating Waterline Circuits

Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create water channels
or circuits in the mold model. Waterlines are drilled holes in the mold model
components. The waterline circuits convey cooling water through the mold
components to control the cooling of molten material. The speed of cooling the
mold is directly related to the profitability of the entire mold product line.
To create a waterline circuit, you must specify the following:
 Name – Determines the name of the waterline as it displays in the model tree.
You can accept the default name if desired.
 Diameter – Enables you to specify the diameter of the waterline hole. You can
either type a value or accept the default diameter value.
 Circuit – Enables you to sketch the waterline circuit path. You must specify the
sketch plane and reference plane and orientation. The sketched section should
only contain linear entities. This is because the waterline path is ultimately drilled
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

into the mold components. As you sketch the circuit in Sketcher, a dashed line
displays on either side of the sketch line, as shown in Figure 1. This dashed line
denotes the actual section diameter of the circuit.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Sketching the Waterline Circuit

 Intersected Parts – Enables you to select the mold components that the waterline
circuit intersects. The following options are available for determining which
components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the waterline:
o Automatic update – When this check box is selected, the system automatically
determines which mold components are cut by the waterline feature. All other
selection options become grayed out. When this option is used, the automatic
intersection excludes the reference models and any molding.
o Advanced intersection – When this check box is selected, the system enables
you to manually define the display level separately for each component.
o Select a component to intersect – Enables you to manually specify which
components are cut by the waterline feature.
o AutoAdd – Similar to the Automatic Update check box, when this option is
selected, the system automatically determines which mold components are cut
by the waterline feature.
o Info – Enables you to display information regarding the waterlines feature in the
browser.

The mold components that are specified display in the Intersected Components
dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can select the component
and either click Remove, or right-click and select Remove.
By default, even though the waterline is created as an assembly feature, you can
also view it within the individual mold component. The feature displays in the
mold component model tree as an assembly cut. You can modify this behavior,
however. The right column of the Intersected Components dialog box displays
the visibility level for each intersected component which, by default, is the mold
component itself. You can click in this field and modify the visibility level of the
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

component to the mold model assembly. When this change is made the waterline
is only visible from within the mold model, and not within the individual mold
component.
Because waterlines are actually drilled holes in the mold components, the end of
each waterline segment displays as a drill point, rather than a flat or rounded
edge.

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Completed Waterline
You can create waterlines any time after the workpiece and reference model are
assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously created waterlines are
automatically subtracted from the mold volumes along with the reference model.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3 – Cutaway of Waterline Circuit

Creating Waterline Circuits

Before you begin
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Waterlines folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click WATERLINES.ASM.

Task 1. Create a basic waterline circuit in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Click Water Line from the Production Features group.

3. Type 8 as the diameter of the waterline circuit and press ENTER.
4. Select datum plane WLINE as the waterline sketching plane and click Default
from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1

5. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

6. Click References from the Setup group and select the bottom of the mold
component.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

7. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

8. Click Line Chain and sketch the three lines.

9. Middle-click twice and edit the dimensions, as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

10. Click OK .
11. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

12. Disable Plane Display .

13. In the Intersected Components dialog box, select the Automatic update check
box.
 Click OK.
14. Click OK from the Water Line dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
15. Notice the waterline feature in the model tree.

16. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .

 In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed objects check box
and click OK.
17. In the model tree, right-click CUT and select Resume.
18. De-select all geometry and zoom in on the waterline.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

19. Right-click WATERLINE_1 and select Edit .

20. Edit the diameter from 8 to 10 and click Regenerate .

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

21. Right-click WLINE_CAVITY.PRT and select Open .

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
22. Notice the assembly cuts in the model tree.
 One of the assembly cuts is for the cutaway, and the other is for the waterline.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

23. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

This completes the procedure.

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions

You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit segment endpoints.
You can apply end conditions to ensure the circuit is capable of being
manufactured. You can apply the following end conditions:
 None – Causes a standard, blind end to be created on the end. By default, each
waterline circuit end has this option specified.
 Blind – Enables you to specify an extra drilled blind end. You can extend the
drilled end a specified distance beyond the endpoint.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Blind Waterline End Condition

 Thru – Enables you to create a straight hole end condition. The system extends
the drilled end out through all mold model geometry.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 3 – Thru Waterline End Condition

 Thru w/Cbore – Enables you to create a counterbore hole end condition. Similar
to the Thru option, the system extends the drilled end out through all mold model
geometry. However, the system also places a counterbore at the entrance to the
mold geometry. You can specify both the counterbore diameter and depth.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Thru w/Cbore Waterline End Condition

In order to define a waterline circuit end condition, you must specify the ends to
which you want to apply end conditions. Rather than selecting a segment
endpoint vertex, you should select the segment itself near the end to which you
want to apply the end condition. If the endpoint you want to apply the condition to
is the intersection of two segments, the system determines which segment
endpoint to apply the end condition to based on the segment you select. You can
press CTRL and select multiple waterline circuit endpoints in order to have the
same end condition applied.

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Waterlines_End folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click END-CONDITIONS.ASM.

Task 1. Add various end conditions to a waterline in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Edit the definition of WATERLINE_1.
3. In the Water Line dialog box, double-click End Condition.
4. Select the front end of the left waterline segment and click OK from the Select
dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. In the menu manager, click Thru w/Cbore > Done/Return.
6. Type 12 for the counterbore diameter and press ENTER.
7. Type 15 for the counterbore depth and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
8. Select the left side of the rear waterline segment and click OK from the Select
dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
9. In the menu manager, click Blind > Done/Return.
10. Type 8 as the value to extend the left side and press ENTER.

Enlarge
Image
Figure 4
11. Select the right side of the rear waterline segment and click OK from the Select
dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
12. In the menu manager, click Thru > Done/Return.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
13. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
14. Click OK from the Water Line dialog box.

15. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .

 In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed objects check box
and click OK.
16. In the model tree, right-click CUT and select Resume.
17. De-select all geometry.
18. Spin the model and inspect the waterline.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

This completes the procedure.

Performing a Waterlines Check

You can perform a clearance check for waterline circuits by selecting the
Waterlines option from the analysis Type drop-down list in the Mold Analysis
dialog box. The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are not too
close to the external surfaces of the mold model. To perform the waterlines
check, you must specify the following:
 Part — Enables you to specify the part whose external surfaces are used for
measuring the minimum clearance. You cannot specify the reference model as
the part.
 Waterline — Enables you to specify which waterlines to analyze. Options include:
o All Waterlines — All waterlines in the mold model are analyzed.
o Select Waterlines — Enables you to specify which waterlines are analyzed.
o Select Surfaces — Enables you to specify a surface of the mold component to be
analyzed against the waterlines and the other external surfaces of the mold
component.
 Minimum Clearance — Enables you to specify the minimum clearance the
waterlines must be from the external surfaces of the specified part.

Understanding Waterlines Check Results

The results of the waterlines check are color-coded into two categories:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Magenta — All areas of the waterlines highlighted in magenta are less than the
minimum clearance specified.
 Green — All areas of the waterlines highlighted in green are greater than or equal
to the minimum clearance specified.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Waterlines Check Results

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Waterlines within Minimum Clearance

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Performing a Waterlines Check

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Waterlines_Check folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click WATERLINES-CHECK.ASM.

Task 1. Perform a waterlines check on waterline circuits in a mold

model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. Press CTRL and select WLINE-CHECK_CAVITY.PRT and WLINE-
CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Compenent Display
Style > Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the waterlines circuits in the cavity and slider mold components.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1

7. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Mold Analysis .
8. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, select Waterlines from the Type drop-down list if
necessary.

 Click Select Part and select WLINE-CHECK_CAVITY.PRT.

 Type 8 as the Minimum Clearance and press ENTER.

 Click Compute.

9. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
10. Notice that only the outer ends of the waterline circuit fall inside of the minimum
clearance specified.
11. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, edit the Minimum Clearance to 10 and click
Compute.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
12. Notice that only the counterbore falls within the minimum clearance specified.

13. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, click Select Part and select WLINE-
CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.
 Edit the Minimum Clearance to 6 and click Compute.

14. Click Repaint .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
15. Notice that it appears the waterline circuit is properly designed.
16. Zoom in on the waterlines circuit and spin the model.
17. Notice that the waterlines circuit is too close to the inner surface of the mold
component.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
18. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box.
19. Orient to the WLINES view orientation.

20. In the model tree, right-click WATERLINE_SLIDER and select Edit .

21. Edit the waterline circuit diameter to 6 and click Regenerate from the Quick
Access toolbar.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6

22. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Mold Analysis .

 Click Select Part and select WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.

 Edit the Minimum Clearance to 6 and click Compute.

23. Click Repaint .

24. Zoom in on the waterline and spin the model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
25. Notice that the waterline circuit now properly falls outside of the minimum
clearance specified.
26. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Understanding Mold Analysis Settings

When performing a mold analysis, you can modify settings to achieve different
results. You can modify both computation and display settings. You can also
save an analysis so that it can be easily rerun at a later time.

Modifying Computation Settings

When performing a mold analysis, the following computation settings are

available:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Viewing Computation Settings
 Sample – Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated. Options
include Quality, Number, and Step.

o Quality – Sets the plot sample type to Quality.

o Number of Points – Sets the plot sample type to Number of Points.

o Step – Sets the plot sample type to Step.

 Resolution – Adjusts the quality of the plot. For a Quality plot, you can adjust the
resolution from Low to High using a slider. For a Number of Points plot, you can
adjust the resolution by specifying the number of points, and for a Step plot you
can adjust the resolution either by specifying a value or by using the slider from
Min to Max.
You can also specify whether to add further accuracy to the mold analysis
computation by selecting the Result refinement check box. This check box
causes additional computation to get more accurate results.

Saving Analyses

You can also save mold analyses within the model you are performing the
analysis on. Saving an analysis is beneficial because it enables you to quickly
repeat the same analysis at different times without having to specify each of the
references and options.
When saving an analysis, you must provide a name that contains no spaces. You
can save multiple analyses within the same model. All saved mold analyses
appear in the Saved Analyses area of the Mold Analysis dialog box, as shown in
Figure 2.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Viewing Saved Analyses
You can show or blank analyses by selecting the desired analysis and then clicking

Show-Blank Analysis . In Figure 2, both the SLIDER and CAVITY

analyses are shown, or visible.
You can delete a saved analysis at any point by selecting it and clicking Delete.
You can display multiple saved analyses at the same time in the graphics window.

Creating Sprues and Runners

Creating Sprues

A sprue is the channel through which molten plastic is injected into the mold. The
sprue should be as short as possible to minimize material usage. Typically, the
sprue is tapered to ensure proper ejection from the mold cavity.
You can create sprues in the mold model using sketch-based features such as
extrudes, revolve, sweeps, and blends.

Creating Runners and Gates

You can create runners and gates in the mold model to transfer material from the
sprue to the mold cavity. The runner is the channel that guides the molten plastic
from the sprue into the mold cavity, and the gate is the restricted entrance from
the runner into the mold cavity that helps to simplify the removal of the final
molded parts from the runners.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Cavity Showing Sprues, Runners, and Gates

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Core Showing Runners and Gates

You can use the Runner feature to create the runners in your mold model.
Depending upon the shape of your gates, you can also use the runner feature to
create them, or you can create them using sketch-based features such as
extrudes, revolves, sweeps, and blends.
You can create runners by sweeping a sketched section along a path or
trajectory. The following section shapes are available, and the dimensions that
define the shapes are shown:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Round — Assigns a circle to the

runner's cross-section.

Enlarge Image

 Half Round — Assigns a half circle to

the runner's cross-section.

Enlarge Image

 Hexagon — Assigns a six-sided

polygon to the runner's cross-section.

Enlarge Image

 Trapezoid — Assigns a quadrilateral to

the runner's cross-section.

Enlarge
Image
 Round Trapezoid — Assigns a
trapezoid with an arc base to the
runner's cross-section.

Enlarge Image

In addition to the shape, you must define the following items:

 Name — Enables you to specify the name of the Runner feature in the model
tree to be different than the default name applied by the system.
 Def Size — Enables you to specify the default size values for each of the runner
cross-section dimensions. The dimensions that you are prompted to specify
depend on the section shape specified.
 Flow Path — Enables you to either select or sketch the flow path for the runner. If
you select the flow path, you can select datum curves as the flow path. If you
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

sketch the flow path, you must specify the sketch plane and reference plane and
orientation. As you sketch the flow path in Sketcher, a dashed line displays on
either side of the sketch line. This dashed line denotes the actual section
diameter of the runner.
 Direction — Specifies the direction of runner creation.
 Intsct Parts — Enables you to select the mold components which the runner
intersects or cuts through. The same options available in the Intersected
Components dialog box for waterlines and ejector pin holes are also available for
runners.
Optionally, the Segment Sizes option enables you to define runners with
segments of varying size within the same runner feature. When you specify a
runner segment that you want to be of different size than the default size, the
system prompts you to specify new dimensions to define the cross-section. Note
that the runner shape specified cannot be changed for individual segments.
You can create sprues and runners any time after the workpiece and reference
model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously created
sprues, runners, and gates are automatically subtracted from the mold volumes
along with the reference model.

Creating Sprues and Runners

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Sprue_Runner folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SPRUE-RUNNER.ASM.

Task 1. Create the main runner.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select PUCK_CAVITY.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the 4 cavity mold model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. Select the SPRUE feature already created in the mold model.

8. Click Runner from the Production Features group.

9. Click Hexagon from the menu manager.
10. Type 10 as the runner width and press ENTER.
11. Select datum plane MAIN_PARTING_PLN as the sketching plane and click
Okay > Default from the menu manager.

12. Click Centerline from the Centerline types drop-down menu and sketch a
centerline on the horizontal reference.
13. Sketch and dimension the line, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2

14. Click OK .
15. Press CTRL, select the PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click
OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.
16. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Name, edit the Name to MAIN_RUNNER,
and press ENTER.
 Click OK.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

Task 2. Create the secondary runners and gates.

17. Click Runner and click Round from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

18. Type 4 as the runner diameter and press ENTER.

19. Click Use Prev > Okay from the menu manager.

20. Click References and query-select datum plane FRONT of the upper-right
reference model as well as its left edge.
 Click Close.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

21. Click Centerline and sketch a centerline on both the vertical and original
horizontal references.
22. Sketch and dimension the line, as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
23. Sketch and dimension the two smaller lines, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
24. Drag a window around the three lines.

25. Click Mirror from the Editing group and select the horizontal centerline.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7

26. Click OK .
27. Press CTRL, select the PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click
OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.

28. Click Repaint .

29. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Name, edit the Name to
SECONDARY_RUNNER, and press ENTER.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
30. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Segment Sizes.
 Press CTRL, select the four smaller segments, and click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
 Type 2 as the runner segment diameter and press ENTER.
 Click Done.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
31. Click OK from the Runner dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10

32. In the model tree, right-click PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and select Open .

33. Spin the model and observe the sprues, runners, and gates.

Enlarge Image
Figure 11

This completes the procedure.

Creating Sprues and Runners

Before you begin
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Sprue_Runner folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click ROD_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Create mold features such as sprues, runners, and gates.

Scenario
In this exercise, you create a sprue, runners, and gates in the rod mold model.

Task 1. Create the sprue in the mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the model tree, right-click ROD_WP.PRT and select Blank.
3. Select ROD_CAVITY.PRT.
4. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
5. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Transparent.
6. Notice the 4 cavity mold.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

8. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as the Sketch Plane.

9. Click Revolve from the Cut & Surface group.

10. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

11. Click References from the Setup group and select the top of the
ROD_CAVITY.PRT.
 Click Close.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2

12. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

13. To create a Geometry Centerline, click Centerline from the Datum groups
and sketch a centerline on the vertical reference.
14. Sketch and dimension the section, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 3

15. Click OK .
16. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

17. Click Complete Feature .

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

18. Rename the Revolve feature to SPRUE.

Task 2. Create the runners.

19. In the ribbon, select the Mold tab.

20. Click Runner from the Production Features group.

21. Click Round from the menu manager.
22. Type 15.24 as the runner diameter and press ENTER.

23. Enable Plane Display .

24. Select datum plane MAIN_PARTING_PLN as the sketching plane and click
Okay > Default from the menu manager.

25. Click Sketch View .

Enlarge Image

Figure 5

26. Click Centerline from the Sketching group and sketch a centerline on the
vertical and horizontal entity.
27. Sketch and dimension the line, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6

28. Click References and select datum plane FRONT for both right side
reference models.
 Click Close.
29. Sketch and dimension two symmetric, equal length lines.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 7

30. Click OK .
31. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
32. In the Intersected Components dialog box, select the Automatic update check
box and click OK.
33. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Name, edit the Name to RUNNER, and
press ENTER.
 Click Preview.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
34. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Segment Sizes.
 Press CTRL, select the two smaller segments, and click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
 Type 8.3 as the runner segment diameter and press ENTER.
 Click Done.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
35. Click OK from the Runner dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 3. Create the gates.

36. Click Runner and select Trapezoid from the menu manager.
37. Type 2.54 as the runner width and press ENTER.
38. Type 1.27 as the runner depth and press ENTER.
39. Type 2.0 as the runner side angle and press ENTER.
40. Type 0.254 as the runner corner radius and press ENTER.
41. Click Use Prev > Okay from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 11

42. Click Sketch View .

43. Click References and select datum plane FRONT for both right side
reference models, as well as the left edge of the upper-right reference model.
 Click Close.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 12

44. Click Centerline from the Sketching group and sketch a centerline on both
the original vertical and horizontal references.
45. Sketch and dimension two symmetric lines of equal length, as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 13

46. Click OK .
47. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

48. In the Intersected Components dialog box, select the Automatic update check
box and click OK.
49. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Name, edit the Name to GATES, and
press ENTER.
50. Click OK from the Runner dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 14

51. Disable Plane Display .

52. In the model tree, right-click ROD_CORE.PRT and select Open .

53. Spin the model and observe the sprue, runners, and gates.

Enlarge Image

Figure 15
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

54. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

55. Right-click ROD_CAVITY.PRT and select Open .

56. Spin the model and notice that the gates are not in the cavity component.

Enlarge Image

Figure 16

57. Click Close .

58. Edit the definition of GATES.
59. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Direction.
60. In the menu manager, click Flip > Okay.
61. Click OK from the Runner dialog box.

62. Right-click ROD_CAVITY.PRT and select Open .

63. Spin the model and notice that the gates are now found in the cavity component.

Enlarge Image
Figure 17

64. Click Close .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

65. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

66. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes

The ejector pin clearance hole is a hole feature that is only available in Mold
mode. Ejector pin clearance holes are created in the mold components so that
ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out. An ejector pin
clearance hole is very similar to the conventional hole feature except that you can
specify a different diameter through each component that the hole intersects in
the mold model. An ejector pin hole is created as an assembly feature in the mold
model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Completed Ejector Pin Holes

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing Ejector Pin Holes in Core

You can create the following types of ejector pin clearance holes:
 Linear – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference, offset
linearly from two references.
 Radial – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference, at a
radial offset from an axis, and at an angle from a plane. When you specify a
radial hole type and select the axis, you can specify the radial offset in the
following ways:
o Diameter – Places the hole with a diameter dimension for the offset.
o Radius – Places the hole with a radius dimension for the offset.
o Linear – Places the hole with a linear dimension for the offset.
 Coaxial – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,
through a selected datum axis. If ejector pins are already assembled in the mold
model, then you can use the coaxial hole to easily place the ejector pin clearance
holes. You can also use the axes created for the ejector pin pads created in the
reference model.
 On Point – Enables you to create an ejector pin hole through a specified datum
point. If there are several datum points in the mold model where the holes should
be placed, you can simultaneously place holes at each point within the same hole
feature.
Once the ejector pin hole type and placement references have been defined, you
must specify the following options:
 Direction – Determines the direction of hole creation. You can flip the direction.
 Intersected Parts – Enables you to select the mold components that the ejector
clearance hole intersects. The following options are available for determining
which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the ejector pin:
o Auto Update Intrscts – When this check box is selected, the system automatically
determines which mold components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature. All
other selection options become grayed out. When this option is used, the
automatic intersection excludes the reference models and any molding.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

o Select a component to intersect – Enables you to manually specify which

components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature.
o AutoAdd – Similar to the Auto Update Intrscts check box, when this option is
selected, the system automatically determines which mold components are cut
by the ejector pin hole feature.
o Info – Enables you to display information regarding the ejector pin hole feature in
the browser.

The mold components that are specified display in the Intersected Components
dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can select the component
and either click Remove, or right-click and select Remove.
 Counterbore – Each ejector pin clearance hole contains a counterbore. You must
also specify the counterbore diameter and depth.

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Ejector-Pin folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click EJECTOR-PIN.ASM.

Task 1. Create a coaxial ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the four ejector pin pads on the reference model.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin

Hole .
8. In the menu manager, click Coaxial > Done.
9. Select datum axis A_6.
10. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click Okay from the
menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
11. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6.
12. Click OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.
13. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter and press ENTER.
14. Type 1 as the counterbore depth and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

15. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

Task 2. Create an On Point ejector pin clearance hole.

16. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin

Hole .
17. In the menu manager, click On Point > Done.
18. Select datum point EJ-PIN and click Done.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
19. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click Okay.
20. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6.
21. Click OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.
22. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter.
23. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

24. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 5

Task 3. Create a Linear ejector pin clearance hole.

25. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin

Hole .
26. In the menu manager, click Linear > Done.
27. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT as the placement plane.
28. Select the front left EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface and type 5.5 as the offset
distance.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

29. Select the front right EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface and type 8 as the offset
distance.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
30. Click Okay from the menu manager.
31. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6.
32. Click OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.
33. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter.
34. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.
35. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8

Task 4. Create a Radial ejector pin clearance hole.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

36. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin

Hole .
37. In the menu manager, click Radial > Done.
38. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT in the upper-right quadrant
as the placement point.
39. Select datum axis A_1 as the radial dimension origin.

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
40. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT to the right of datum axis A_1 as the radial
dimension origin.
41. Type 225 as the Angle and press ENTER.
42. Click Radius > Done from the menu manager.
43. Type 3.75 as the radius value.
44. Click Okay from the menu manager.
45. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT in the bottom-left quadrant and specify a hole
diameter of 0.6.
46. Click OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.
47. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter.
48. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.
49. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 10

50. Disable Plane Display , Axis Display , and Point Display .

This completes the procedure.

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and dimensions
that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by helping you
establish a library of commonly used geometry.

Defining a UDF from a “Template” Model

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 1 – “Template” Model

To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same
base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the features
that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is shown in Figure 1.
When modeling the features, be sure to consider the number of references being
created. In most cases, minimizing the number of references makes the most
efficient UDFs.
Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name.
The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company, and is
defined by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from the Group
Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate.
Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options:
 Subordinate – Creates a reference to the original template model and
automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the UDF
placement in the future. The original model must be present for the subordinate
UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the original model, they
are automatically reflected in the UDF.
 Standalone – Does not reference the template model. It copies all the original
model information into the UDF file. If you make any changes to the original
model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a standalone UDF,
you have the option to create a separate reference part. If created, the reference
part has the same name as the UDF, but with a “_GP” suffix.

Selecting Features to Include

Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features must be
sequential in the model tree.

Defining Prompts

You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected
features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require prompts.
The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference when placing a
UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the target model. Therefore,
the prompts you create for each reference should be descriptive. Each reference
is highlighted in the graphics window as you define its prompt, as shown in Figure
2. If a reference was used to create more than one feature, you are asked to
create either Single or Multiple prompts for that reference.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Highlighted Surface While Defining Prompts

 Single – Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several features.
When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the reference you
select for this prompt applies to all features in the group that use the same
reference.
 Multiple – Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this reference.
If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is highlighted, so you can
type a different prompt for each feature.

Defining Variable Items

You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an
optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a
dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's
dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the
current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of the
feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features,
dimensions, and parameters.

Modifying a UDF

When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You can
edit a defined UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.

Creating UDFs
Before you begin
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Feature_Tools\Create_udf folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CREATE_UDF.PRT.

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Task 1. Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Right-click Extrude 2 in the model tree and select Information > Reference
Viewer.
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog box, notice that Extrude 2 references datum
plane RIGHT and Extrude 1.
4. Click the down arrow next to Extrude 1 and cursor over each of the surface
references.
5. Notice that the top, flat surface and the circular surface are the two references on
the model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. Click Close from the Reference Viewer.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

7. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

8. Click UDF Library from the Utilities group.

9. Click Create from the menu manager.
10. Type keyway as the name and press ENTER.
11. In the menu manager, click Subordinate > Done > Add > Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature to add and click Done/Return.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
13. Notice the top surface highlighted in red. This is the first required reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
14. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface.
15. Type sketching plane and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

16. Notice datum plane highlighted in red. This is the second required reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
17. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface.
18. Type orientation reference plane and press ENTER.
19. Notice the cylindrical surface highlighted in red. This is the third required
reference.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
20. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface.
21. Type cylinder surface and press ENTER.
22. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length) 2 dimensions.
25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.
26. Notice that the first dimension is highlighted.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
27. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the dimension.
28. Type key width and press ENTER.
29. Notice that the second dimension is highlighted.

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
30. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the dimension.
31. Type key length and press ENTER.
32. Click OK > Done/Return to complete UDF creation.

This completes the procedure.

Placing UDFs
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design models, it
can be more efficient to have the system create that geometry for you using
UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be much faster than
creating it new each time.

Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)

When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a UDF

by clicking User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group in the ribbon,
and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The original template model is
required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides the User
Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place UDFs in
multiple models.
When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model.
The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created
from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.

Selecting Placement References for the Prompts

Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that was
defined during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references, you can
view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the correct references.
As you select references, the UDF preview placement dynamically updates in the
graphics window.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Viewing References on the Original UDF
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Selecting References for UDF Placement

Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements

You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation.
These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.

Specifying Options

Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement. You
can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a scaling factor
for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size of the UDF for
different size models, or between models of different units. Plus, you can specify
whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of the elements that are not
specified as variables in the UDF.
You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF on-the-fly.
This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After selecting features to
redefine, you must step the regeneration of the UDF back past the selected
features, and then step forward to regenerate them. After the selected UDF
feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears, enabling you to redefine it.

Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement

Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in one of
two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the Adjustments tab.
You can select each available Orientation Item and flip its orientation, watching
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

the preview dynamically update. If the placement is successful, a local group is

created in the model tree. Items hidden in the UDF remain in their hidden status
when placed into the model.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – The Placed UDF

You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.

Updating a Modified UDF

If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it results
in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group without
any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified, the copied group is not
updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original UDF, then
changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the group. You
must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking UDF
Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu and then
regenerating the model.

Placing UDFs
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Feature_Tools\Place_UDF folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PLACE_UDF.PRT.

Task 1. Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group.

 Select KEYWAY.GPH and click Open.
 Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration and click OK.
3. Notice that a reference model has been created for this UDF, and displays in a
subwindow.
 Notice that the first required reference is highlighted in the subwindow, and
placement preview of the feature is shown in the main graphics window.
 Notice that Reference 1 is highlighted in the User Defined Feature Placement
dialog box and the description prompt reads sketching plane.
 Select a corresponding planar surface, as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog box.
 Notice that this reference is highlighted in the subwindow.
 Notice that the description prompt reads orientation reference plane.
 Select a corresponding plane, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog box.
 Notice that this reference is highlighted in the subwindow.
 Also notice that the description prompt reads cylinder surface.
 Select a corresponding surface, as shown.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
6. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, select the Variables tab.
7. Edit the Value for the d5 dimension from 2.00 to 4.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
8. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, select the Adjustments tab.
9. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, click Flip and then click

Accept .

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
 For a more complex UDF, there may be multiple reference directions that can be flipped. The system
lists each reference direction in the dialog box, enabling you to flip/preview each reference.

This completes the procedure.

Creating Waterline Circuits

Before you begin

Training Files:
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Waterlines_Rod folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click ROD_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Create waterline circuits.
 Perform a waterlines check on a waterline circuit.

Scenario
In this exercise, you create a waterline circuit and perform a waterlines check on
the circuit. Our design criterion has indicated that the waterline circuit must run at
least 25 millimeters away from the external surfaces of the mold components.

Task 1. Create a waterline circuit.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the model tree, right-click ROD_WP.PRT and select Blank.
3. Select ROD_CAVITY.PRT.
4. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
5. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Transparent.
6. Select the Mold tab.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1

7. Click Water Line from the Production Features group.

8. Type 6.35 as the waterline circuit diameter, and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

9. Create a new datum plane for the sketching plane by doing the following:

 Click Plane from the Datum group.

 Select datum plane MAIN_PARTING_PLN as the offset reference.
 Edit the Offset Translation value to 38.1 and press ENTER.
 Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
10. Click Default from the menu manager.

11. Disable Plane Display .

12. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

13. Click References from the Setup group and select the bottom and left
surface edges of the mold model as additional sketching references.
 Click Close.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

15. Sketch three lines and dimension them, as shown.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 4

16. Click OK .
17. In the Intersected Components dialog box, click AutoAdd.
 Click OK.
18. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
19. Click Preview from the Water Line dialog box.

20. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
21. In the Water Line dialog box, double-click End Condition.
22. Press CTRL and select the front endpoints of the waterline circuit.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
23. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
24. Click Thru w/Cbore > Done/Return from the menu manager.
25. Type 12.7 as the counterbore diameter value at the first endpoint and press
ENTER.
26. Type 12.7 as the counterbore depth value at the first endpoint and press ENTER.
27. Type 12.7 as the counterbore diameter value at the second endpoint and press
ENTER.
28. Type 12.7 as the counterbore depth value at the second endpoint and press
ENTER.
29. Select the left endpoint of the rear waterline segment.

Enlarge Image

Figure 7
30. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

31. Click Thru > Done/Return from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8
32. Press CTRL and select the back endpoint of the left segment, the right endpoint
of the rear segment, and the back endpoint of the right segment.

Enlarge Image
Figure 9
33. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
34. Click Blind > Done/Return from the menu manager.
35. Type 25.4 as the extension value at the first endpoint and press ENTER.
36. Type 25.4 as the extension value at the second endpoint and press ENTER.
37. Type 25.4 as the extension value at the third endpoint and press ENTER.
38. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
39. Click OK in the Water Line dialog box to complete creating the waterline circuit.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
40. De-select all geometry.

Task 2. Mirror the waterline feature.

41. Select WATERLINE_1 from the model tree.
42. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.

43. Click the Modifiers group drop-down menu and select Mirror .
44. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT from the model tree as the mirror plane.

45. Click Complete Feature .

46. Select ROD_CAVITY.PRT as the component to intersect.

47. Click OK from the Intersected Components dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 11
48. De-select all geometry.

Task 3. Perform a waterlines check.

49. Select the Mold tab.

50. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Mold Analysis .
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

51. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, select Waterlines from the Type drop-down list,
if necessary.

52. Click Select Part and select ROD_CAVITY.PRT from the model tree.

53. Type 25 for the Minimum Clearance and click Compute.

54. Click Repaint .

55. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and notice that the waterline circuit runs too
close to the reference models.

Enlarge Image
Figure 12
56. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box.
57. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

58. In the model tree, right-click WATERLINE_1 and select Edit .

59. Edit the waterline offset from 38.1 to 41 and click Regenerate .

60. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Mold Analysis .

61. Click Select Part and select ROD_CAVITY.PRT.

62. Type 25 for the Minimum Clearance and click Compute.

63. Click Repaint .

64. Spin the model and notice that the circuit is no longer within the required
minimum clearance.
65. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 13

66. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

67. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.

Creating UDFs in the Casing Mold Model

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so
already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click
File > Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session >
Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\UDF_Casing folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click UDF_TEMPLATE.ASM.

Objectives
 Create user-defined features.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Place user-defined features on mold models.

Scenario
In this exercise, you create a user-defined feature containing a cut and hole by
using a template model. You define the items that can be varied in the user-
defined feature, and place the UDF in the casing mold model.

Task 1. Create a user-defined feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.

3. Click UDF Library from the Utilities group.

4. Click Create from the menu manager.
5. Type hot-nozzle as the UDF name and press ENTER.
6. In the menu manager, click Subordinate > Done.

7. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .

 In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
8. In the model tree, press CTRL and select features CUT and HOLE.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
9. Click Done > Done/Return from the menu manager.
10. Type nozzle sketching plane as the first prompt and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
11. Click Single > Done/Return from the menu manager.
12. Type nozzle placement plane as the second prompt and press ENTER.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
13. Type nozzle mid plane as the third prompt and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
14. Type gating surface as the fourth prompt and press ENTER.

Enlarge
Image
Figure 5
15. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
16. In the UDF dialog box, double-click Var Dims.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

17. Click Switch Dimensions from the Model Intent group.

18. Select hole_dia:1, dia1:1, dia2:1, depth1:1, and depth2:1.

Creating a Molding
When a mold is filled, molten plastic is injected into the sprue, and it then travels
through the runners and gates to fill the mold cavity. The solidified result is known
as the molding. There can be only one molding part in the model at a time.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Molding Part

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Another Molding Part

Creo Parametric enables you to simulate the filling of the mold cavity and
generate the molding. In addition to the mold cavity, the sprues, runners, and
gates are also filled to generate the final molding. The molding part is created by
using the following molding formula:
 Molding = sum of all current workpiece geometry - assembly level cuts that
intersect the workpiece (waterlines, for example) - all extracted parts (sliders and
cores, for example) - ejector pin clearance holes
The molding part is created in the mold model, and it contains a single Molding
feature that contains the solid geometry.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Mold Model

The molding feature cannot be redefined, but the part is a fully functional part.
You can retrieve it in Part mode and perform various operations on the molding
part such as removing excess material using Pro/NC, calculating mass
properties, and also generating a mesh for flow analysis. To save the molding
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

part, you must save the mold model before erasing it from memory or exiting your
current Creo Parametric session.
The molding part maintains a parent/child relationship with the mold components
and assembly level features. Therefore, the molding automatically updates when
changes are made to the mold components or assembly level features. For
example, if the sprue diameter is increased, the molding part automatically
updates to reflect the larger diameter.

Creating a Molding
Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Molding folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MOLDING.ASM.

Task 1. Create a molding in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.
2. In the graphics window, select MLD_HUB_MOLD_CAVITY.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display
Style > Transparent.
5. Notice the sprue and runner.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
6. In the ribbon, select the Mold tab.

7. Click Create Molding from the Components group.

8. Type HUB_MOLDING as the Part name and press ENTER.
9. Press ENTER to accept the default Mold Part Common Name [hub_molding.prt].

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
10. Notice the new component created in the model tree called HUB_MOLDING.PRT.

11. Right-click HUB_MOLDING.PRT and select Open .

12. Spin the model and inspect the molding part.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
13. Notice the single Molding feature in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

Opening the Mold

You can simulate the mold opening process to determine whether your final
design matches your original design intent. The mold opening process is a series
of steps, containing one or more moves. You can specify moves for any
component, or member, of the mold model except the reference model and the
workpiece. It is convenient to blank the reference model, workpiece, and all mold
volumes, as well as the parting lines and surfaces before opening the mold.
In order to simulate the mold opening process, you must define the following:
 Define Move — An instruction to move one or more members of the mold model.
When defining a move, you must specify the following items:
o The members to be moved.
o The direction reference of the movement. You can select a linear edge, axis, or
plane to indicate the direction. When the direction reference is specified, an arrow
indicates the positive direction.
o The offset value. The members move the amount specified in the direction of the
reference specified. The members move parallel to the edge or axis, or normal to
the plane. You can specify a positive offset value or a negative offset value to
move the member in the opposite direction.
 Define Step — A collection of defined moves for opening the mold.
You can also perform the following operations on the mold opening simulation:
 Delete — Enables you to delete an existing step.
 Delete All — Enables you to delete all existing steps.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Modify — Enables you to modify an existing step by adding or deleting moves

from the step.
 Modify Dim — Enables you to modify the offset value of a given move. You must
regenerate the mold model in order for the new value to take effect.
 Reorder — Enables you to switch the order of existing steps. You can specify the
step you want reordered, then select the step that you want it to become.
 Explode — Enables you to simulate the mold opening by stepping through the
sequence, in order, one step at a time. Members included in the moves of the
step are translated according to the specified offsets. You can continue to step
through all the steps in the sequence. A message in the message window
indicates when all components in the mold model have been successfully
exploded. You can also animate the entire opening sequence.

Rules for Defining a Move

You must remember the following rules when defining moves:

 Each step may contain several moves that are performed simultaneously.
 A member can be included in only one move per step.
 A move may contain several members, but they are all offset in the same
direction and by the same value.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Fully Opened Mold
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Closed Mold

Enlarge Image

Figure 3 – Partially Open Mold

Opening the Mold

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Opening folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click OPEN-MOLD.ASM.

Task 1. Create a mold opening sequence of steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Mold Opening from the Analysis group.

3. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager.
4. Select OPEN-MOLD_SLIDER1.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. Select the top, front edge to define the direction.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
6. Type -150 and press ENTER.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

7. Click Define Move from the menu manager.

8. Query-select OPEN-MOLD_SLIDER2.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog
box.
9. Select the top, front edge to define the direction.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
10. Type 150 and press ENTER.
11. Click Done from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
Figure 4
12. Click Define Step > Define Move.
13. Select OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box.
14. Select the right, vertical edge to define the direction.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
15. Type 250 and press ENTER.
16. Click Done from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
17. Click Define Step > Define Move.
18. Select OPEN-MOLD_MOLDING.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box.
19. Select the right, vertical edge to define the direction.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
20. Type 100 and press ENTER.
21. Click Done from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image
Figure 8

Task 2. Simulate the mold opening.

22. Click Explode > Open Next from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
23. Click Open Next two more times to step through the mold opening sequence.
24. The OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.PRT needs to open before the sliders.
25. Click Reorder > Step 1 from the menu manager.
26. Click Step 2 as the new step for Step 1 to become.
27. Click Explode > Open Next.

Enlarge Image

Figure 10
28. Notice that the cavity now opens first.
29. Click Open Next two more times to step through the mold opening process.
30. Click Explode > Animate All from the menu manager to animate the full mold
opening sequence.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

This completes the procedure.

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step

You can perform draft checking on mold components during the mold opening
sequence.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Opened Mold

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Draft Check on a Slider

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 3 – Draft Check on the Molding

You can use draft checking to determine whether the mold components have the
correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles in order to facilitate the mold
opening process.
In order to perform a draft check, you must first specify on which step of the
opening sequence you want to perform the draft check. You must also specify the
following items to perform a draft check during the mold opening sequence:
 Pull Dir – Specifies the pull direction to be used for the draft check. You can
specify the pull direction using either of the following methods:
o Specify – Enables you to select a pull direction. You can filter the pull direction
reference by plane, coordinate system, curve, edge, or axis and specify the
proper reference. You can also flip the pull direction to the opposite side of the
reference.
o Move Num – Enables you to specify a pull direction reference by specifying a
move number in the step.
 Draft Angle – Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check.
 One Side/Both Sides – Enables you to specify whether the draft check is
performed on one or both sides of the direction reference.
 Full Color/Three Color – Enables you to specify whether the display is shown
using the full color spectrum or with three colors.
 Part or surface to check for drafting – Once you have specified the pull direction
and draft angle, you must specify a part to check for drafting or a surface to
check for drafting.

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Opening_Draft-Check folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click DRAFT-CHECK.ASM.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Task 1. Perform draft checks on mold opening sequence steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Mold Opening from the Analysis group.

3. Click Explode > Open Next from the menu manager.
4. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_CAVITY.PRT opens in the first step, and that it
opens upward.
5. Click Open Next from the menu manager.
6. Notice that the sliders open next in the second step, horizontal to the mold model
pull direction.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
7. Click Open Next.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
8. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_MOLDING.PRT is ejected in the third step, and
that it opens upward.
9. Click Modify > Step 2 > Draft Check > Both Sides > Three Color > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Click Move Num > Move 1 from the menu manager.
11. Type 2 as the draft check angle and press ENTER.
12. Select DRAFT-CHECK_SLIDER1.PRT and notice the draft.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
13. Click Continue > Setup Dft Ck from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

14. Select the Pull Dir check box and click Both Sides > Three Color > Done >
Move Num > Move 2 from the menu manager.
15. Select DRAFT-CHECK_SLIDER2.PRT and notice the draft.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
16. Click Done/Return > Done/Return > Done from the menu manager.
17. Click Modify > Step 3 > Draft Check > One Side > Full Color > Done.
18. Click Move Num > Move 1.
19. Type 2 as the draft check angle and press ENTER.
20. Select DRAFT-CHECK_MOLDING.PRT and notice the draft.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
21. Click Continue and select DRAFT-CHECK_CORE.PRT and notice the draft.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
22. Click Done/Return > Done/Return > Done > Done/Return.

This completes the procedure.

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step

Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for interference with a static
part for each move you define. After you have defined a move, you must select a
static part to check for interference with the current part that you have defined for
the move. Areas that are interfering either have their curves highlighted, as
shown in Figure 1 or, if interference curves cannot be found, the resulting
interference is highlighted by a red point, as shown in Figure 2.

Enlarge Image
Figure 1 – Interference Curves
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 2 – Interference Point
You can delete the move and try another method of opening the mold to prevent
the interference of parts. You may have to redefine your mold components.

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Opening_Interference folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click INTERFERENCE.ASM.

Task 1. Perform interference checking on mold opening sequence

steps.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Mold Opening from the Analysis group.

3. Click Explode > Open Next from the menu manager.
4. Notice the INTERFERENCE_CAVITY.PRT opens in the first step, and that it
opens upward.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. Click Open Next from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
6. Notice that the sliders open next in the second step, horizontal to the mold model
pull direction.
7. Click Open Next.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

8. Notice the INTERFERENCE_MOLDING.PRT is ejected in the third step, and that

it opens upward.
9. Click Modify > Step 1 > Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager.
10. Query-select INTERFERENCE_MOLDING.PRT as the static part.
11. Notice that the status bar states that no interference was detected between the
cavity and the molding.

Enlarge Image
Figure 3
12. Click Static Part from the menu manager and select
INTERFERENCE_SLIDER1.PRT.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
13. Notice that there is no interference between the slider and the cavity.
14. Click Done/Return > Done from the menu manager.
15. Click Modify > Step 2 > Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager.
16. Select INTERFERENCE_MOLDING.PRT as the static part.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
17. Notice the highlighted interference curves between the molding and the slider.
18. Click Done/Return.
19. Click Interference > Move 2 from the menu manager.
20. Select INTERFERENCE_MOLDING.PRT as the static part.

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
21. Notice the highlighted interference curves between the molding and the second
slider.
22. Click Done/Return > Done.
23. Click Modify > Step 3 > Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager.
24. Select INTERFERENCE_CORE.PRT as the static part.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 7
25. Notice the highlighted interference point between the molding and
INTERFERENCE_CORE.PRT.
26. Click Done/Return > Done > Done/Return.

This completes the procedure.

Viewing Mold Information

You can view information about your mold model any time you are in Mold mode

by clicking the Analysis group drop-down menu and selecting Mold . You
can view the following types of information about the mold:
 BOM – Displays a bill of materials of all components found in the mold model.
 Components – Displays information on all the components in the mold model,
including reference models, workpiece, extracted components, and the molding.
 Cavity layouts – Displays information on all cavity layouts. You can view the
coordinate system references used for placement of the cavity, the layout type,
the number of cavities in respective directions, the names and locations of each
cavity, and the overall workpiece size.
 Split volumes – Displays all volumes created in the mold model as a result of split
operations. You can view the mold volume name, its display status in the mold
model, and its feature ID.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 2 – Viewing Split Volumes Information

 Created volumes – Displays information on all sketched mold volumes in the
mold model. You can view the mold volume name, its display status in the mold
model, and its feature ID.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1 – Viewing Created Volumes Information

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Parting surface – Displays information on all parting surfaces created in the mold
model. You can view the parting surface name, its display status in the mold
model, and its feature ID.
 Split – Displays all the split operations performed in the mold model. You can
view the parent and child feature ID's of the split, the parting surface used, and
the resulting volumes created.
 Last volume – Displays the last created volume in the mold model. You can view
the mold volume name, how it was created, its display status in the mold model,
and its feature ID.
 Shrinkage – Displays any shrinkage applied to the reference model. If the mold
model contains more than one reference model, you must specify for which
reference model you want shrinkage information. You can view the coordinate
system specified for the shrinkage, the shrinkage formula used, and the shrink
factors used.
You can specify whether you want the output displayed in an Information window
within Creo Parametric, whether you want it written to a file, or both.

Viewing Mold Information

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Information folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click MOLD-INFO.ASM.

Task 1. Investigate the information for a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Mold .

3. In the Mold Information dialog box, clear all Type check boxes except for
Shrinkage.
 Clear the To file check box, leaving the To screen check box selected.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Click Apply.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
4. Click Close from the information window.
5. In the Mold Information dialog box, clear the Shrinkage check box.
 Select the Cavity layouts check box.
 Click Apply.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 2
6. Click Close from the information window.
7. In the Mold Information dialog box, clear the Cavity layouts check box.
 Select the Created volumes check box.
 Click Apply.

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
8. Click Close from the information window.
9. In the Mold Information dialog box, clear the Created volumes check box.
 Select the Parting surface check box.
 Click Apply.

Enlarge Image

Figure 4
10. Click Close from the information window.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

11. In the Mold Information dialog box, clear the Parting surface check box.
 Select the Split volumes check box.
 Click Apply.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
12. Click Close from the information window.
13. In the Mold Information dialog box, clear the Split volumes check box.
 Select the BOM check box.
 Click Apply.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 6
14. Click Close from the information window.
15. Click Close from the Mold Information dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Opening the Shower Head Mold Model

Before you begin

Training Files:
Download the training files using the button below, if you have not done so already.

Download

Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File >
Close until no models display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase
Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to the
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Mold\Shower-Head_Open folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD.ASM.

Objectives
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

 Create moldings.
 Define steps and moves to simulate the mold opening process.
 Perform a draft check during the mold opening process.
 Perform an interference check during the mold opening sequence.
 Resolve an interference in the mold component geometry.

Scenario
In this exercise, you create the molding and also simulate the mold opening
process in the shower head mold model.

Task 1. Create the molding.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Create Molding from the Components group.

3. Type Shower_Head_Molding as the name and press ENTER.
4. Press ENTER to accept the Mold Part Common Name.

Enlarge Image

Figure 1
5. Notice that the molding is created.

Task 2. Simulate the opening of the mold.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

6. Click Mold Opening from the Analysis group to simulate the mold opening
process.
7. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager.
8. Select PLUG.PRT as the member for the first move.

Enlarge Image

Figure 2
9. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
10. Select the left, vertical edge to define the move direction.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 3
11. Type 320 as the movement value and press ENTER.
12. Click Define Move from the menu manager.
13. Select CAVITY.PRT as the member for the second move.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 4
14. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
15. Select the left, vertical edge to define the move direction.

Enlarge Image

Figure 5
16. Type 230 as the movement value and press ENTER.
17. Click Done from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 6
18. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager.
19. Select SLIDER_RIGHT_TAB.PRT as the member for the first move.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 7
20. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
21. Select the front, horizontal edge to define the move direction.

Enlarge Image

Figure 8
22. Type 130 as the movement value and press ENTER.
23. Click Define Move from the menu manager.
24. Select SLIDER_LEFT_TAB.PRT as the member for the second move.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 9
25. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
26. Select the front, horizontal edge to define the move direction.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 10
27. Type -130 as the movement value and press ENTER.
28. Click Done from the menu manager.

Enlarge Image

Figure 11
29. Click Define Step > Define Move.
30. Select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLDING.PRT as the member for the move.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 12
31. Click OK in the Select dialog box
32. Select the front, right, vertical edge to define the move direction.

Enlarge Image
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Figure 13
33. Type 100 as the movement value and press ENTER.
34. Click Done from the menu manager.
35. Spin the model and observe the mold opening sequence.

Enlarge Image

Figure 14

Task 3. Perform a draft check on the PLUG.PRT.

36. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
37. Click Modify > Step 1 from the menu manager.
38. Click Draft Check > Both Sides > Three Color > Done from the menu manager.
39. Click Move Num > Move 1 from the menu manager.
40. Type 2 as the draft check angle and press ENTER.
41. Select PLUG.PRT.
42. Notice that in the area of the plug where there is proper negative draft (the cyan
color) there is also positive draft (magenta).
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image
Figure 15
43. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.

Task 4. Perform an interference check on the PLUG.PRT.

44. Click Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager.
45. Select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLDING.PRT as the static part.
46. Spin the model and observe the location of the detected interference.

Enlarge Image
Figure 16
47. Notice that this detected interference is at the same location as the positive draft.
48. Click Done/Return > Done > Done/Return from the menu manager.
 Because the PLUG.PRT has positive draft in this location, it interferes with the molding as the mold
opens. The mold component geometry needs to be redefined so that there is no interference with the
molding.

Task 5. Redefine the PLUG_VOL mold volume to change the

PLUG.PRT mold component geometry.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

49. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

50. Press CTRL and select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_REF.PRT and
SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_WRK.PRT from the model tree.
51. Right-click and select Unblank.

Enlarge Image

Figure 17
52. In the model tree, edit the definition of Revolve 1.
53. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch.

54. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

55. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 18
56. Drag a window around the existing sketch and delete it.

57. Click Centerline from the Datum group and sketch a centerline on the
vertical reference.

58. Click Hidden Line from the In Graphics toolbar and zoom in on the top of
the sketch.

59. Click Project from the Sketching group and select the three edges.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 19
60. Click Close from the Type dialog box.

61. Click Line Chain from the Sketching group and sketch the four remaining
lines.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 20

62. Click OK .
63. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

64. Click Shading .

 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 21

65. Click Complete Feature .

66. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar to update the mold model.
67. Press CTRL and select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_REF.PRT and
SHOWER_HEAD_MOLD_WRK.PRT from the model tree.
68. Right-click and select Blank.

69. Right-click PLUG.PRT and select Open .

70. Spin the model and notice the difference in geometry.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 22

71. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to the mold model.

Task 6. Rerun the interference check in the mold opening sequence.

72. Click Mold Opening .

73. Click Modify > Step 1 from the menu manager.
74. Click Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager.
75. Select SHOWER_HEAD_MOLDING.PRT as the static part.
76. Notice, in the status bar, that there is no longer any interference detected.
77. Click Done/Return > Done > Done/Return from the menu manager.
 Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Enlarge Image

Figure 23

78. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.

79. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK
to erase the model from memory.

This completes the exercise.